WO2020048481A1 - 通信方法及装置 - Google Patents

通信方法及装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020048481A1
WO2020048481A1 PCT/CN2019/104368 CN2019104368W WO2020048481A1 WO 2020048481 A1 WO2020048481 A1 WO 2020048481A1 CN 2019104368 W CN2019104368 W CN 2019104368W WO 2020048481 A1 WO2020048481 A1 WO 2020048481A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
time domain
reference signal
symbol
domain resource
information
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/104368
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
邵家枫
官磊
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to EP19856741.4A priority Critical patent/EP3836469A4/en
Publication of WO2020048481A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020048481A1/zh
Priority to US17/193,210 priority patent/US11937281B2/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0003—Two-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0005—Time-frequency
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H04L5/0051—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver of dedicated pilots, i.e. pilots destined for a single user or terminal
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/50—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources
    • H04W72/53—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources based on regulatory allocation policies
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0446—Resources in time domain, e.g. slots or frames
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/10—Connection setup
    • H04W76/11—Allocation or use of connection identifiers
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0003—Two-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0005—Time-frequency
    • H04L5/0007—Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A), DMT
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053—Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0091—Signaling for the administration of the divided path
    • H04L5/0094—Indication of how sub-channels of the path are allocated

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method and device.
  • the NR system supports a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH), a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH), a physical downlink control channel (physical downlink control channel, PDCCH), or a physical uplink control channel (PDCCH).
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • PDCCH physical uplink control channel
  • the length of the time domain resource of physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) can be set to a variety of symbol lengths.
  • RS reference signal
  • the position of the reference signal in uplink or downlink transmission of the same symbol length is predefined or notified by high-level signaling. In this way, the position of the reference signal does not change or can only change slowly, which is not suitable for rapid changes. Channel conditions and system requirements. Therefore, it is necessary to solve the problem of how to accurately indicate the time domain resources of the reference signal with a small reference signal overhead in the NR system, so as to improve the transmission efficiency of the system.
  • the present application provides a communication method and device, which accurately indicate time-domain resources of a flexibly configured reference signal with less overhead.
  • a communication method including: acquiring time domain resources of candidate reference signals in one or more time units; and receiving downlink control information, where the downlink control information includes first indication information and a first channel Transmission information, the first indication information is used to indicate one or more of the following information: a time domain resource of a first reference signal, and the time domain resource of the first reference signal is a time domain of the candidate reference signal One or more time domain resources among the resources; time domain resources of the second reference signal, the time domain resources of the second reference signal being one or more symbols in the time domain resources where the first channel is located; or There is no time domain resource of the reference signal on the one or more time units.
  • the network device can accurately indicate the time domain resources of the flexibly configured reference signal with less overhead, and the terminal device can accurately determine the information of the time domain resources of the flexibly configured reference signal, thereby improving system transmission. s efficiency.
  • the The method further includes: dividing the symbol configuration set into one or more symbol configuration subsets; and determining a time domain resource of a candidate reference signal according to the one or more symbol configuration subsets.
  • the time domain resources of the candidate reference signals can be determined according to the symbol configuration subset.
  • the first indication information only needs to indicate the symbol configuration subset to determine the corresponding candidate reference signal. Time domain resources, thereby saving the overhead of the first indication information.
  • the method further includes: receiving first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure a terminal device to support a reference signal when the candidate reference signal is Transmission on domain resources.
  • the network device enables the terminal device to select the time domain resource of the reference signal to transmit the reference signal by using the solution of the present application through the first configuration information.
  • the method further includes: receiving second configuration information, where the second configuration information terminal device supports no reference signal on a time domain resource of the first channel .
  • the first indication information received by the terminal device may indicate a time domain resource without a reference signal on the one or more time units.
  • a communication method including: sending downlink control information, where the downlink control information includes first indication information and transmission information of a first channel, and the first indication information is used to indicate one or more of the following Kind of information: the time domain resource of the first reference signal, the time domain resource of the first reference signal is one or more of the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal; the time domain of the second reference signal Resource, the time domain resource of the second reference signal is one or more symbols in the time domain resource where the first channel is located; or the time domain resource without the reference signal on the one or more time units; and Transmitting a reference signal according to the first instruction information.
  • the The method further includes: dividing the symbol configuration set into one or more symbol configuration subsets; and determining a time domain resource of a candidate reference signal according to the one or more symbol configuration subsets.
  • the method further includes: sending first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure a network device to support a reference signal when the candidate reference signal is Transmission on domain resources.
  • the method further includes: sending second configuration information, where the second configuration information terminal device supports no reference signal on a time domain resource of the first channel .
  • a communication method including: a terminal device acquiring information of one or more time units; and the terminal device determining the one or more time units according to the information of the one or more time units The symbol configuration set in the network; the terminal device determines a time domain resource of a candidate reference signal according to the symbol configuration set in the one or more time units; the terminal device receives downlink control information, and the downlink control information includes First indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate one or more of the following information: a time domain resource of a first reference signal, and a time domain resource of the first reference signal is a time of the candidate reference signal One or more time domain resources in the domain resources; time domain resources of the second reference signal, and the time domain resources of the second reference signal are one or more symbols in the time domain resources where the first channel is located; Or there is no time domain resource of a reference signal on the one or more time units; the terminal device transmits a first channel and a reference signal according to the downlink control information.
  • the effective symbol configuration is used to determine the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal, and avoid reverse symbol positions (for example, the corresponding PDSCH avoids (Uplink symbols, avoid downlink symbols for PUSCH), so that the position of the reference signal can be flexibly changed.
  • the terminal device determining a time domain resource of a candidate reference signal according to the symbol configuration set in the one or more time units includes: configuring the symbol.
  • the set is divided into one or more symbol configuration subsets, and a time domain resource of a candidate reference signal is determined according to the one or more symbol configuration subsets.
  • a communication method including: a network device sends downlink control information, the downlink control information includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate one or more of the following information: A time domain resource of a reference signal, the time domain resource of the first reference signal being one or more time domain resources of the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal; a time domain resource of a second reference signal, the first The time domain resources of the two reference signals are one or more symbols in the time domain resources in which the first channel is located; or the time domain resources of which there is no reference signal in the one or more time units; The downlink control information transmits the first channel and the reference signal.
  • a communication method including: a terminal device receiving first information, the first information being used to instruct the terminal device to transmit N first channels; and the terminal device transmitting a reference signal according to the second channel
  • the second channel is the X-th first channel of the N first channels in time domain order within a time unit, where X is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and N is greater than or equal to 2
  • X is less than or equal to N
  • the time domain resource of the reference signal is among the time domain resources of the second channel or the time domain resource of the reference signal is in the time domain of the second channel Before resources.
  • the first information indicates two or more first channels, and one of the two or more first channels is in a second channel.
  • the reference signal is transmitted on the time domain resource of the reference signal, so that the network device can accurately indicate the time domain resource of the reference signal with less overhead.
  • the network device / terminal device transmits the reference signal on the time domain resource of the reference signal. This improves the efficiency of system transmission.
  • the transmitting, by the terminal device, a reference signal according to a second channel includes: according to the second channel, the terminal device is in a time domain resource in which the second channel is located.
  • the first symbol transmits the reference signal; or the terminal device transmits the reference signal according to a second channel, a first symbol preceding a time domain resource in which the second channel is located; wherein the first symbol is The Yth symbol in time domain order, Y is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1, and the number of the first symbol is less than or equal to N.
  • a symbol of a transmission reference signal is specifically determined, and the symbol may be predefined.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device sends capability information to a network device, and the capability information is used for Indicating that the terminal device has a capability of transmitting a reference signal on a part of the N first channels.
  • the terminal device reports capability information to the network device, so that the network device can configure the terminal device with a second channel for transmitting a reference signal according to the capability of the terminal device.
  • the method further includes that the terminal device receives Second information, the second information is used to instruct the terminal device to transmit a reference signal on a part of the N first channels.
  • a communication method including: a network device sends first information, the first information is used to instruct the terminal device to transmit N first channels; and the network device transmits a reference signal according to the second channel Where the second channel is the X-th first channel of the N first channels in time domain order within a time unit, where X is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and N is greater than or equal to 2 And X is less than or equal to N, the time domain resource of the reference signal is among the time domain resources of the second channel or the time domain resource of the reference signal is in the time domain of the second channel Before resources.
  • the transmitting, by the network device, a reference signal according to a second channel includes: the network device, according to the second channel, in a time domain resource where the second channel is located The first signal of the reference signal is transmitted; or the network device transmits the reference signal according to the second channel, the first symbol preceding the time domain resource in which the second channel is located; wherein the first symbol is The Yth symbol in time domain order, Y is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1, and the number of the first symbol is less than or equal to N.
  • the method further includes: the network device receives capability information from the terminal device, and the capability The information is used to indicate that the terminal device has a capability of transmitting a reference signal on a part of the N first channels.
  • the method further includes that the network device sends Second information, the second information is used to indicate that the terminal device can transmit a reference signal on a part of the N first channels.
  • the N first channels carry the same transmission block.
  • the second channel corresponds to a first redundant version.
  • the first redundant version is a redundant version 0 and / or a redundant version 3.
  • redundant version 0 and redundant version 3 in the NR system are corresponding data transmissions carrying all decoded information
  • the data transmission corresponding to redundant version 0 and redundant version 3 is relatively more important, that is, the two
  • the first channel corresponding to each redundant version should carry a reference signal so that the receiving device can demodulate and decode this data transmission through the reference signal.
  • the second channel is each of the N first channels.
  • the Xth first channel in time domain order in time unit.
  • the symbol interval between the start symbols of the time-domain resources is less than 14 symbols, or the start symbols of the time-domain resources where the next first channel among the two first channels adjacent to the N first channels are located It is the first symbol after the termination symbol of the time domain resource where the previous first channel is located.
  • the first channel is a valid uplink channel, and the valid uplink channel
  • the time domain resource in which it is located does not include any downlink symbol; or the first channel is a valid downlink channel, and the time domain resource in which the effective downlink channel is located does not include any one uplink symbol.
  • the first symbol when the first channel is an uplink channel, the first symbol is uplink Symbol; or when the first channel is a downlink channel, the first symbol is a downlink symbol.
  • the first information includes the number of repetitions of the first channel, and / Or, information of time domain resources where one or more first channels of the N first channels are located.
  • the network device indicates the number of repetitions of the first channel.
  • the first channel is repeatedly transmitted, there is no need to send a reference signal on each first channel, which saves system overhead and improves transmission efficiency.
  • information of time domain resources where multiple first channels are located may be the same, and the first information may include information of time domain resources where one first channel is located.
  • a communication method including: a terminal device acquiring time domain resources of candidate reference signals in one or more time units; the terminal device receiving downlink control information, where the downlink control information includes first indication information,
  • the first indication information is used to indicate one or more of the following information: a time domain resource of a first reference signal, and the time domain resource of the first reference signal is one of the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal. Or multiple time domains, or time domain resources of a second reference signal, the time domain resources of the second reference signal being one or more symbols in the time domain resources where the first channel is located; or There is no time domain resource of a reference signal on one or more time units; the terminal device transmits a reference signal according to the first indication information.
  • the network device indicates the time domain resource used for the transmission of the reference signal through the downlink control information, or the time domain resource without the reference signal at one or more time units, and the network device can use a smaller overhead,
  • the time domain resources of the flexibly configured reference signals are accurately indicated, and the terminal device can accurately determine the information of the time domain resources of the flexibly configured reference signals, thereby improving the efficiency of system transmission.
  • a communication method including: network equipment sending downlink control information, where the downlink control information includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate one or more of the following information: Time domain resources of the reference signal, the time domain resources of the first reference signal are one or more of the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal, or the time domain resources of the second reference signal, so The time domain resource of the second reference signal is one or more symbols in the time domain resource in which the first channel is located; or the time domain resource without the reference signal in the one or more time units; the network device Transmitting a reference signal according to the first instruction information.
  • the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal include one or more of the following time domain resources: time domain resources configured by high-level signaling; a predefined A time domain resource; or a time domain resource determined according to a symbol configuration set in the one or more time units, the symbol configuration set being a subset or a complete set of a symbol configuration list.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is related to the number of time domain resources of the candidate reference signal.
  • the number has a corresponding relationship, and a time domain resource of a candidate reference signal can be determined according to a value of the first indication information.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is ceiling (log2 (1 + Z1)) bits or ceiling (log2 (2 + Z1)) Bits, where ceiling indicates rounding up, and Z1 is the number of time domain resources of the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information and the number of time domain resources of the candidate reference signal have a specific correspondence relationship, and the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal can be determined according to the value of the first indication information.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is related to the number of the symbol configuration subset.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is ceiling (log2 (1 + Z2)) bits or ceiling (log2 (2 + Z2)) Bits, where ceiling indicates rounding up, and Z2 is the number of symbol configuration subsets.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information and the number of symbol configuration subsets have a specific correspondence relationship.
  • the first indication information when used to indicate a time domain resource of the first reference signal, a bit corresponding to the first indication information
  • the state value is related to a time domain resource of the first reference signal.
  • a time domain resource of the first reference signal may be determined by using a bit state value corresponding to the first indication information.
  • a bit state value corresponding to the first indication information and a time domain resource of the first reference signal are at the time of the candidate reference signal.
  • the chronological order in the domain resources is related.
  • the first indication information when used to indicate a time domain resource of the first reference signal, a bit corresponding to the first indication information
  • the state value is related to an index of a symbol configuration subset in which a time domain resource of the first reference signal is located.
  • the downlink control information further includes: a first bit status value corresponding to the first indication information, where the first bit status value is used for Indicating that there is no reference signal on the one or more time units, the first bit status value is predefined; and / or, a second bit status value corresponding to the first indication information, the second bit The status value is used to indicate a time domain resource of the second reference signal, and the second bit status value is predefined.
  • one or more bits of the bits of the first indication information correspond to the symbol configuration subset on a one-to-one basis.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a time domain resource of a first reference signal, and the first indication information further includes an offset value, so
  • the offset value includes one or more of the following: a slot offset value between a time slot in which a time domain resource of the first reference signal is located and a time slot in which the first channel is located; the first A symbol offset value between a start symbol of a time domain resource of a reference signal and a start symbol of the first channel; a start symbol of a time domain resource of the first reference signal and an end of the first channel A symbol offset value between symbols; a symbol offset value between a termination symbol of a time domain resource of the first reference signal and a termination symbol of the first channel.
  • the time domain resources of the first reference signal may be relative time domain resources, that is, relative to the time domain resources of the first channel, the time domain resources include time slot information and / or symbol information.
  • the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal include time domain resources configured by high-level signaling and / or predefined time domain resources, where
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a time domain resource of a first reference signal, and the first indication information includes symbol information and / or time slot information, where the symbol information is one or more of the following: an absolute symbol index, A symbol offset index relative to a start symbol of the first channel, and a symbol offset index relative to a stop symbol of the first channel;
  • the slot information is one or more of the following: absolute slot index, relative A time slot offset index of a time slot in which the first channel is located.
  • the time domain resource of the first reference signal may be a relative time domain resource, that is, a time domain resource relative to the first channel, or an absolute time domain resource.
  • the time domain resource includes time slot information and / or symbol information.
  • the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal includes a time domain resource of a reference signal configured by high-level signaling, and the reference of the high-level signaling configuration
  • the time domain resources of the signal include one or more of the following: high-level signaling is configured for time slots; high-level signaling is configured for downlink control information format; high-level signaling is configured for wireless network temporary identification RNTI; high-level signaling is targeted The mapping type of the first channel is configured; or the high-level signaling is configured for a search space of downlink control information.
  • the network device may configure a time domain resource for transmitting a reference signal with respect to a transmission direction of a time slot and / or a set of time slots.
  • the time domain resources of the reference signal can be configured more flexibly, for example, the uplink and downlink transmission requirements are different, so the time domain resources of the reference signal can be configured differently.
  • the use of system resources in different time slots is different, so the time domain resources of the reference signal can be configured differently.
  • the network device may configure a time domain resource for transmitting a reference signal according to a format of the downlink control information.
  • the correspondence between the pre-configured DCI format and the reference signal of the network device can implicitly indicate the time domain resources of different reference signals through the format of the DCI, so as to increase the indicated reference signal without further increasing the number of bits in the DCI.
  • the range of time domain resources improves system flexibility and thus system efficiency.
  • the network device may configure a time domain resource for transmitting the reference signal for the RNTI.
  • the correspondence between the pre-configured RNTI and reference signals of network devices can implicitly indicate the time domain resources of different reference signals through the RNTI, so as to increase the time domain resources of the reference signal without further increasing the number of bits in the DCI Range, improve system flexibility, and thus improve system efficiency.
  • the network device may configure a time domain resource for transmitting a reference signal for a mapping type of the first channel.
  • the mapping relationship between the pre-configured mapping type of the network device and the reference signal, and then the time-domain resources of different reference signals can be implicitly indicated by the mapping type, so as to increase the number of indicating reference signals without further increasing the number of bits in the DCI.
  • the scope of time domain resources improves system flexibility and thus system efficiency.
  • the network device may also configure a time domain resource for transmitting a reference signal for a search space of downlink control information.
  • a time domain resource of the candidate reference signal is one or more of the following symbols in the one or more time units: the one Or the first symbol in the earliest time unit among the time units; the last symbol in the last time unit in the one or more time units; a pre-defined one in the one or more time units or Multiple symbols; one or more symbols configured by high-level signaling in the one or more time units.
  • a communication device which can implement the communication method in the first aspect, the third aspect, the fifth aspect, or the seventh aspect.
  • the communication device may be a chip (such as a baseband chip or a communication chip) or a terminal device.
  • the above method may be implemented by software, hardware, or by executing corresponding software by hardware.
  • the structure of the communication device includes a processor and a memory; the processor is configured to support the device to perform a corresponding function in the foregoing communication method.
  • the memory is coupled to a processor and stores programs (instructions) and / or data necessary for the device.
  • the communication device may further include a communication interface for supporting communication between the device and other network elements.
  • the communication device may include a unit or a module that performs a corresponding action in the foregoing method.
  • a processor and a transceiver device are included, the processor is coupled to the transceiver device, and the processor is configured to execute a computer program or an instruction to control the transceiver device to receive and process information. Sending; when the processor executes the computer program or instructions, the processor is further configured to implement the foregoing method.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or an input / output interface.
  • the transceiver device is a transceiver circuit or an input / output interface.
  • the structure of the communication device includes a processor; the processor is configured to support the device to perform a corresponding function in the foregoing communication method.
  • the transceiver unit may be an input / output unit, such as an input / output circuit or a communication interface.
  • the transceiver unit may be a transmitter and a receiver, or a transmitter and a receiver.
  • a communication device which can implement the communication method in the second aspect, the fourth aspect, the sixth aspect, or the eighth aspect.
  • the communication device may be a chip (such as a baseband chip, a communication chip, or the like) or a network device, and the foregoing method may be implemented by software, hardware, or by executing corresponding software by hardware.
  • the structure of the communication device includes a processor and a memory; the processor is configured to support the device to perform a corresponding function in the foregoing communication method.
  • the memory is coupled to the processor and holds programs (instructions) and data necessary for the device.
  • the communication device may further include a communication interface for supporting communication between the device and other network elements.
  • the communication device may include a unit module that performs a corresponding action in the foregoing method.
  • a processor and a transceiver device are included, the processor is coupled to the transceiver device, and the processor is configured to execute a computer program or an instruction to control the transceiver device to receive and process information. Sending; when the processor executes the computer program or instructions, the processor is further configured to implement the foregoing method.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or an input / output interface.
  • the transceiver device is a transceiver circuit or an input / output interface.
  • the structure of the communication device includes a processor; the processor is configured to support the device to perform a corresponding function in the foregoing communication method.
  • the transceiver unit may be an input / output unit, such as an input / output circuit or a communication interface.
  • the transceiver unit may be a transmitter and a receiver, or a transmitter and a receiver.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program or an instruction.
  • the computer program or the instruction is executed, the methods described in the foregoing aspects are implemented.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided, and when the instructions are run on a computer, the computer is caused to execute the methods described in the above aspects.
  • a communication system including the communication devices in the ninth and tenth aspects.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system involved in this application
  • FIG. 2a is an exemplary location diagram of a DMRS of a PUSCH mapping type A
  • FIG. 2b is an exemplary location diagram of a DMRS of a PUSCH mapping type B;
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of interaction of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 4a is a schematic diagram of PDSCH transmission
  • FIG. 4b is a schematic diagram of PUSCH transmission
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of interaction of another communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of an example symbol configuration set
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of dividing an example symbol configuration subset
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of interaction of another communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of interaction of yet another communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of time domain resources of an example second reference signal
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of still another communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of still another communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 15 is a schematic structural diagram of still another communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 16 is a schematic structural diagram of still another communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 17 is a schematic structural diagram of still another communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of still another communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of still another communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of still another communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system involved in the present application.
  • the communication system may include one or more network devices 100 (only one is shown) and one or more terminal devices 200 connected to the network device 100.
  • the network device 100 may be a device capable of communicating with the terminal device 200.
  • the network device 100 may be any device having a wireless transmitting and receiving function. Including but not limited to: base stations (NodeB), evolved base stations (eNodeB), base stations in the fifth generation (5G) communication system (such as gNB), base stations or network equipment in future communication systems, Access nodes, wireless relay nodes, wireless backhaul nodes, etc. in WiFi systems.
  • the network device 100 may also be a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenario.
  • the network device 100 may also be a small station, a transmission node (TRP), or the like.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the network device.
  • the terminal device 200 is a device with wireless transmitting and receiving functions, which can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld, wearable or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on the water, such as on a ship; it can also be deployed in the air, such as an aircraft , Balloons and satellites.
  • the terminal device may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a computer with a wireless transmitting and receiving function, a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (AR) terminal device, or an industrial control device.
  • wireless terminal in industrial control wireless terminal in self driving, wireless terminal in remote medical, wireless terminal in smart grid, transportation safety Wireless terminals, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, and the like.
  • Terminal equipment can also be sometimes called user equipment (UE), access terminal equipment, UE unit, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal device, mobile device, terminal, wireless communication device, UE Agent or UE device, etc.
  • “Multiple” means two or more. In view of this, in the embodiments of the present application, “multiple” can also be understood as “at least two”.
  • “And / or” describes the association relationship of the associated objects, and indicates that there can be three kinds of relationships. For example, A and / or B can mean that there are three cases in which A exists alone, A and B exist, and B exists alone.
  • the character "/”, unless otherwise specified, generally indicates that the related objects are an "or" relationship.
  • the high-level signaling involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to high-level protocol layer signaling sent by a network device.
  • the high-level protocol layer is the protocol layer above the physical layer.
  • the high-level protocol layer may specifically be one or more of the following protocol layers: a medium access control (MAC) layer, a radio link control (RLC) layer, and a packet data convergence protocol (packet) Data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, radio resource control (RRC) layer, and non-access stratum (NAS).
  • MAC medium access control
  • RLC radio link control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • RRC radio resource control
  • NAS non-access stratum
  • the reference signals involved in the embodiments of the present application include uplink reference signals and downlink reference signals.
  • the uplink reference signal may be a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), a phase-tracking reference signal (PT-RS), or a sounding reference signal (SRS), or Are other reference signals and are not specifically limited herein.
  • the DMRS can be further divided into a reference signal (PUSCH DMRS) for PUSCH demodulation and a reference signal (PUCCH DMRS) for PUCCH demodulation.
  • PUSCH DMRS reference signal
  • PUCCH DMRS reference signal
  • the downlink reference signal can be DMRS, PT-RS, or channel-state information reference signal (CSI-RS), or synchronization sequence, or physical broadcast channel block (synchronization / shysical broadcast channel block, SSB).
  • DMRS can be further divided into reference signals for PDSCH demodulation (PDSCH and DMRS), reference signals for PDCCH demodulation (PDCCH and DMRS), and reference signals for physical broadcast channel (Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH) demodulation).
  • PDSCH and DMRS reference signals for PDSCH demodulation
  • PDCCH and DMRS reference signals for PDCCH demodulation
  • PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
  • a method for determining a time domain resource of an uplink reference signal may have the following implementation manners. It can be understood that the following implementation manners are merely examples, and the method for determining the time domain resources of the uplink reference signal is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the time domain resources of PUSCH and DMRS are related to the following parameters: PUSCH mapping type (PUSCH mapping type), uplink DMRS extra position indication information (UL-DMRS-add-pos), and the time when PUSCH is occupied in a slot.
  • PUSCH mapping type PUSCH mapping type
  • UL-DMRS-add-pos uplink DMRS extra position indication information
  • the number of domain symbols, the number of symbols occupied by each DMRS time domain resource index corresponding to the DMRS is one or two symbols, and whether the PUSCH performs frequency hopping. among them:
  • PUSCH mapping types including PUSCH mapping type A and PUSCH mapping type B.
  • PUSCH mapping type A As shown in Tables 1 and 2, when PUSCH does not perform frequency hopping transmission, l 0 is symbol 2 or symbol 3. At this time, Table 1 and Table The time domain resource index in 2 is the absolute index of the symbol, and the instant domain resource index reports the absolute symbol position relative to the time slot where the PDSCH is located, where the symbol 2 or symbol 3 is determined according to higher-layer signaling. As shown in Table 3, when the PUSCH performs frequency hopping transmission, l 0 is the first symbol on each frequency hopping portion of the PUSCH. At this time, the time domain resource index in Table 3 is the relative index of the symbol, and the instant domain resource index. Notified is the symbol position relative to the first symbol of each hopping portion.
  • PUSCH mapping type B The relationship between PUSCH mapping type B and the time domain resources of the reference signal: As shown in Tables 1 and 2, when PUSCH performs non-frequency hopping transmission, l 0 is the first symbol in the time domain resource where the PUSCH is located. At this time, the time domain resource index in Tables 1 to 2 is a relative index of the symbols, and the instant domain resource index notifies the symbol position relative to the first symbol of the PUSCH. As shown in Table 3, when the PUSCH performs frequency hopping transmission, l 0 is the first symbol on each part of the PUSCH. At this time, the time domain resource index in Table 3 is a relative index of the symbol, and the instant domain resource index notifies the symbol position relative to the first symbol of each frequency hopping part.
  • the uplink DMRS extra position indication information can take the value 0, 1, 2 or 3, which is notified by higher layer signaling.
  • the number of symbols occupied by each DMRS time domain resource index corresponding to the DMRS can be 1 or 2 symbols.
  • the DMRS time domain resource index and the number of symbols occupied by the DMRS in Tables 1 to 3 can be determined as the DMRS time domain resource.
  • an uplink DMRS time domain resource index determined through Tables 1 to 3 is l 0 .
  • PUSCH frequency hopping is: according to a predefined manner, the PUSCH is divided into two parts in the time domain in the time domain, and the PUSCH in each frequency hopping part is transmitted on different frequency domain resources.
  • the PUSCH's time domain length is 8 symbols.
  • the 8-symbol PUSCH will be divided into two frequency hopping portions PUSCH with a length of 4 symbols.
  • Each frequency hopping portion of the PUSCH may be called perhop PUSCH.
  • Two 4-symbol PUSCHs are transmitted on different frequency domain resources.
  • Frequency domain resources can be one or more resource blocks (RBs), one or more resource elements (REs), one or more carriers / cells, or one or more Multiple partial bandwidths (BWP) can also be one or more RBs on one or more BWPs on one or more carriers, or one or more BWPs on one or more carriers One or more REs on one or more RBs.
  • RBs resource blocks
  • REs resource elements
  • BWP Multiple partial bandwidths
  • Table 1 DMRS time domain resource index, when each DMRS time domain resource index corresponds to 1 symbol and does not hop
  • the DMRS time domain resource index is shown in FIG. 2a.
  • the DMRS time domain resource index is shown in Figure 2b. It can be known from FIG. 2a that l 0 is symbol 2 or symbol 3, and the time domain resource index 0 to 13 is the absolute index of the symbol. It can be known from FIG. 2b that l 0 is the first symbol in the time domain resource where the PUSCH is located, and the time domain resource indexes F0 to F13 are relative indexes of the symbols. Further, in FIG.
  • Table 2 DMRS time domain resource index. When each DMRS time domain resource index corresponds to 2 symbols occupied by DMRS and the PUSCH does not perform frequency hopping
  • Table 3 DMRS time domain resource index. When each DMRS time domain resource index corresponds to 1 symbol occupied by the DMRS and the PUSCH performs frequency hopping
  • a method for determining a time domain resource of a downlink reference signal may have the following implementation manners. It can be understood that the following implementation manners are merely examples, and the method for determining the time domain resources of the downlink reference signal is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the time domain resources of PDSCH and DMRS are related to the following parameters: PDSCH mapping type (PDSCH mapping type), downlink DMRS extra position indication information (DL-DMRS-add-pos), and The number of domain symbols and the number of symbols occupied by each DMRS time domain resource index corresponds to one or two symbols. It should be noted that there is no frequency hopping on the downlink. among them:
  • PDSCH mapping types including PDSCH mapping type A and PDSCH mapping type B.
  • the time domain resource index in Table 4 and Table 5 is an absolute index of the symbol, and the instant domain resource index reports the absolute symbol position relative to the time slot where the PDSCH is located.
  • the relationship between the PDSCH mapping type B and the time domain resource of the reference signal: l 0 is the first symbol of the time domain resource where the PDSCH is located.
  • the time domain resource indexes in Tables 4 and 5 are relative indexes of symbols, and the instant domain resource index reports the symbol position of the first symbol relative to the time domain resource where the PDSCH is located.
  • the downlink DMRS extra location indication information can take the value 0, 1, 2, or 3 and is notified by higher layer signaling.
  • the number of symbols occupied by the DMRS corresponding to each downlink DMRS time domain resource index may be 1 or 2 symbols.
  • DMRS time domain resources that exist can be determined according to Tables 4 and 5 below. For example, in Table 4, a determined downlink time domain resource DMRS index l 0, when the DMRS symbols in each downlink time domain resource occupied by the DMRS index may correspond to one symbol, the time domain resource downlink DMRS index, i.e.
  • Table 4 PDSCH DMRS time domain resource symbol index.
  • the time domain resource index of each DMRS corresponds to the number of symbols occupied by the DMRS, it is 1 symbol.
  • Table 5 PDSCH DMRS time domain resource index, when each DMRS time domain resource index corresponds to the number of symbols occupied by DMRS is 2 symbols
  • the present application provides a communication method and device.
  • a network device can accurately indicate time-domain resources of a flexible-configured reference signal with a small overhead, and a terminal device can accurately determine information of time-domain resources of the flexible-configured reference signal. , Thereby improving the efficiency of system transmission.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of an interaction process of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application. The method includes:
  • the terminal device acquires time domain resources of candidate reference signals in one or more time units.
  • the network device in uplink transmission or downlink transmission, when a device transmits a channel in one or more time units, it needs to transmit a reference signal in the one or more time units, and the reference signal can be used for channel estimation.
  • the network device in the downlink transmission, the network device sends a reference signal, the terminal device receives the reference signal, and the terminal device uses the reference signal for channel estimation; in the uplink transmission, the terminal device sends the reference signal, the network device receives the reference signal, and the network device Use the reference signal for channel estimation.
  • the terminal device In the downlink transmission, the terminal device needs to receive the reference signal, and the network device needs to send the reference signal. In S101, the terminal device and / or the network device obtains time domain resources of candidate reference signals in one or more time units. Correspondingly, in the uplink transmission, the network device needs to receive the reference signal and the terminal device needs to send the reference signal, and then the network device and / or the terminal device acquires time domain resources of the candidate reference signal in one or more time units.
  • the time domain resource in this application may be one or more time slots, and may also be one or more symbols on one or more time slots.
  • the symbol may be an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing symbol (OFDM).
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing symbol
  • the OFDM symbol may use transform precoding (transform precoding), or may not use transform precoding. If transform precoding is used, it can also be called single carrier-frequency division multiplexing (SC-FDM).
  • the length of a time unit in this application may include one or more time domain resources.
  • the one or more time units may be configured by high-level signaling, or may be predefined, or may be determined according to downlink control information (DCI).
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the network device sends downlink control information.
  • the terminal device receives downlink control information.
  • the downlink control information includes first indication information and transmission information of the first channel.
  • the first channel is used to carry data and / or control information.
  • the first channel may be one or more of PUSCH, PDSCH, PUCCH, and PDCCH. It can be understood that the description of the “first channel” does not mean that only one channel or one channel is established between the terminal device and the network device, and the types and numbers of the first channels are not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the transmission information of the first channel includes information such as a modulation and coding method, time-frequency resources, and the like.
  • the network device sends the transmission information so that the terminal device receives the first channel according to the transmission information.
  • the first channel includes a PDSCH or a PDCCH.
  • a network device sends a DCI, and the DCI includes PDSCH transmission information.
  • the PDSCH transmission information includes indication information such as time-frequency resources, modulation and coding methods of the PDSCH.
  • the terminal device can determine the transmission resource and transmission mode of the PDSCH.
  • the first channel includes PUSCH or PUCCH.
  • the network device sends DCI, and the DCI includes transmission information of the PUSCH.
  • the PUSCH transmission information includes indication information such as time-frequency resources, modulation and coding methods of the PUSCH.
  • the terminal device can determine the transmission resource and transmission mode of the PDSCH.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate one or more of the following information:
  • Time domain resources of the first reference signal, and the time domain resources of the first reference signal are one or more time domain resources of the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal;
  • a time domain resource of a second reference signal, and the time domain resource of the second reference signal is one or more symbols in a time domain resource where the first channel is located;
  • time domain resources of the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal obtained in S101 are referred to as time domain resources of the first reference signal;
  • the time domain resource corresponding to the index of the time domain resource of the reference signal in 5 is referred to as the time domain resource of the second reference signal, and will not be described repeatedly below.
  • the determination methods of the first reference signal and the second reference signal are different.
  • the time domain resources of the first reference signal may be determined in advance through first-level signaling or DCI.
  • the time domain resources of the second reference signal are determined through Tables 1 to 5 and the second higher layer signaling.
  • the first high-level signaling and the second high-level signaling correspond to different high-level signalings, or correspond to different fields in the same high-level signaling.
  • the time domain resources of the first reference signal and the time domain resources of the second reference signal may be the same or different, which is not limited in this application.
  • the time domain resource of the first reference signal may also be a time domain resource of the time domain resources of the second reference signal.
  • the time domain resources of the second reference signal when the time domain resources of the second reference signal determined through Tables 1 to 5 are multiple time domain resource indexes, such as l 0 , 7, the terminal is in uplink transmission.
  • the device sends multiple time domain resource indexes, and the network device receives multiple time domain resource indexes.
  • the terminal device receives multiple time domain resource indexes, and the network device sends multiple time domain resource indexes.
  • the terminal device when it is determined that the time domain resources of the first reference signal are multiple time domain resource indexes by using the method in this application, the terminal device does not need to send multiple time domain resource indexes during uplink transmission. Instead, the time domain resource index of the transmitted reference signal may be determined according to DCI or other information. Wherein, the indexes of the time domain resources of the second reference signals in the above Tables 1 to 5 are predefined, and the time domain resources of the candidate reference signals may be before the reference signal is transmitted by the terminal device in the manner in this application. Acquired.
  • the time domain resource used for transmitting the reference signal may be the time domain resource of the first reference signal or the time domain resource of the second reference signal.
  • the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal may be configured by high-level signaling, and the terminal device receives the high-level signaling sent by the network device, and the high-level signaling includes the time domain of the candidate reference signal. Resources.
  • the network device sends configuration signaling of time domain resources to the terminal device through high-level signaling, and the configuration signaling includes time domain resources of candidate reference signals in one or more time units configured.
  • the terminal device receives the configuration signaling and obtains time domain resources of the candidate reference signal.
  • the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal may also be predefined, and the terminal device obtains the time domain resources of the predefined candidate reference signal from its own storage area. Similarly, the network device obtains a time domain resource of a predefined candidate reference signal from its own storage area.
  • the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal may be one or more symbols of a high-level signaling configuration or a predefined one in the one or more time units.
  • the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal may be understood as one or more symbols in each time unit in the one or more time units, or all of the one or more time units in the one or more time units.
  • the high-level signaling may be a number of symbols in each time unit where a time domain resource of a candidate reference signal is located, or a number of all symbols in the one or more time units.
  • the symbol may also be a symbol index and / or a slot index in the one or more time units used to determine a time domain resource of the candidate reference signal, or may be used to determine the one or more time units.
  • the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal is one or more of the following symbols in the one or more time units: The first symbol; the last symbol in the last time unit in the time sequence in the one or more time units; one or more symbols predefined in the one or more time units; the one or more The last symbol in the earliest time unit in time series in each time unit; the first symbol in the last time unit in time sequence in the one or more time units; each of the one or more time units The first symbol in each time unit; the last symbol in each time unit in the one or more time units.
  • the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal may be a symbol, such as the first or last symbol in a time unit; it may also include multiple symbols, such as each time in multiple time units The first symbol in the unit; or the first symbol in one time unit and the last symbol in another time unit, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal may also be a time domain resource determined by the terminal device according to the symbol configuration set in the one or more time units, where the symbol configuration set is a symbol configuration list. Subset or complete set.
  • the symbol configuration list may be a symbol configuration list sent by a network device to a terminal device or a predefined symbol configuration list, including an uplink symbol configuration list and / or a downlink symbol configuration list.
  • the symbol configuration can be an uplink symbol configuration or a downlink symbol configuration.
  • the symbol configuration set is determined by a symbol configuration list.
  • the symbol configuration list refers to a time domain resource configuration occupied by an uplink or downlink channel, so that a terminal device determines a time domain resource occupied by a downlink channel used for transmission through high-level signaling or downlink control information.
  • each symbol configuration in the symbol configuration list includes index information of a start symbol, continuous symbol number information, and slot offset value information, and may further include other information, which is not limited in the present application.
  • the time slot offset value information is used to indicate the number of time slots between the time slot where the downlink control channel is located and the time slot where the uplink channel corresponding to the downlink control channel is located.
  • the time slot offset value information is used to indicate the number of time slots between the time slot where the downlink control channel is located and the time slot where the downlink channel corresponding to the downlink control channel is located.
  • the index information of the start symbol and the number of continuous symbols can also be determined by the start and length indicator (SLIV) information, as shown in Table 7.
  • bit size of the SLIV field is 7 bits.
  • the specific correspondence between the SLIV, the starting downlink symbol index S, and the number of continuous symbols of the downlink symbol L is:
  • Table 6 and Table 7 are in a one-to-one correspondence, the difference is that Table 6 explicitly informs S and L, and Table 7 indicates S and L through a SLIV.
  • one symbol configuration corresponds to one line in the symbol configuration list.
  • a symbol configuration set refers to a collection of one or more symbol configurations. The specific way of determining the symbol configuration set can be shown as follows.
  • the effective symbol configuration set corresponding to each time unit in one or more time units is unioned to obtain the symbol configuration set corresponding to the one or more time units.
  • each symbol configuration in the symbol configuration list at the same time, by comparing the validity of the symbol configuration in multiple time units corresponding to the one or more time units, it is determined whether the downlink symbol configuration is valid, thereby further A set of symbol configurations corresponding to the one or more time units composed of valid symbol configurations is determined.
  • the symbol configuration set in the one or more time units does not include a first symbol configuration in which the symbol configuration list satisfies the following condition: the first symbol configuration corresponds to The uplink symbol of each overlaps partially or completely with the downlink symbol of each time unit in the one or more time units, or the uplink symbol corresponding to the first symbol configuration is in the one or more time units The downlink symbols of any one time unit partially overlap or all overlap.
  • the first symbol configuration can be understood as an invalid uplink symbol configuration, and other symbol configurations can also be configured as invalid configurations, which is not limited in this application.
  • the symbol configuration set includes a set of valid uplink symbol configurations. It should be noted that the symbol configuration set is a subset or a complete set of the symbol configuration set excluding the first symbol configuration.
  • the symbol configuration set in the one or more time units does not include a second symbol configuration in which the symbol configuration list satisfies the following condition: the second symbol configuration corresponds to The downlink symbol and the uplink symbol of each time unit in the one or more time units partially overlap or fully overlap with each other, or the uplink symbol corresponding to the second symbol configuration is in the one or more time units The uplink symbols of any one time unit partially overlap or all overlap.
  • the second symbol configuration may be understood as an invalid downlink symbol configuration, and there may be other symbol configurations as invalid configurations, which is not limited in this application.
  • the symbol configuration set includes a set of valid downlink symbol configurations. It should be noted that the symbol configuration set is a subset or a complete set of the symbol configuration set excluding the first symbol configuration.
  • the uplink channel cannot be transmitted, so the uplink symbol configuration is invalid.
  • the downlink symbol configuration is invalid.
  • the first indication information indicates a time domain resource of the first reference signal
  • the terminal device determines that the time domain resource of the reference signal is the time domain resource of the first reference signal according to the first indication information.
  • the time domain resource of the first reference signal is one or more time domain resources of the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal acquired by the terminal device in step S101.
  • the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal include time domain resource index C1, time domain resource index C2, time domain resource index C3, and time domain resource index C4, then the time domain resources of the first reference signal are the above four time One or more time domain resource indexes in the domain resource index.
  • the reference signal must be transmitted on the time domain resources of the first channel, and the time domain resources of the first reference signal are more flexible.
  • the time domain resource of the first reference signal may be one symbol or multiple symbols in one or more time slots, and the time domain resource of the first reference signal does not need to transmit the reference signal on the time domain resource of the first channel.
  • the time domain resources of the first reference signal need not be related to the number of symbols of the time domain resources of the first channel.
  • the first indication information indicates a time domain resource of the second reference signal
  • the terminal device determines that the time domain resource of the reference signal is the time domain resource of the second reference signal according to the first indication information.
  • the time domain resource of the second reference signal is one or more symbols in the time domain resource where the first channel is located.
  • the time domain resources in which the first channel is located may be the time domain resources in Tables 1 to 5.
  • the terminal device when the first indication information indicates the time domain resource of the second reference signal, the terminal device according to the number of persistent symbols corresponding to the PDSCH or PUSCH, the DMRS extra position indication information, the mapping type and other information and Tables 1 to 5 A time domain resource of a predefined reference signal, and determine a time domain resource of the second reference signal.
  • the first indication information indicates a time domain resource without a reference signal on the one or more time units. If the first channel is an uplink channel, the terminal device will not send a reference signal on the one or more time units. If the first channel is a downlink channel, the terminal device will not receive the reference signal on the one or more time units.
  • the time domain resource without the reference signal on the one or more time units may be indicated by a default value or a reserved value in the first indication information.
  • the time domain resource where the first channel is located does not have the time domain resource of the reference signal.
  • the method further includes the following steps: receiving second configuration information, where the second configuration information is used to configure that the network device supports no reference signal on a time domain resource of the first channel .
  • the first indication information received by the terminal device may indicate a time domain resource without a reference signal on the one or more time units.
  • transmission can be understood as sending or receiving.
  • the method further includes: S103.
  • the network device sends a first channel according to the downlink control information.
  • the terminal device receives the first channel according to the downlink control information.
  • the network device also sends the first channel on a time domain resource where the first channel is located.
  • the terminal device also receives the first channel on the time-frequency resource where the first channel is located.
  • the terminal device when the first indication information indicates a time domain resource without a reference signal on the one or more time units, the terminal device does not need to receive on the one or more time units according to the downlink control information.
  • the reference signal, and the terminal device may send the reference signal according to other downlink control information or high-level signaling or a predefined definition.
  • the network device does not need to send a reference signal on the one or more time units according to the downlink control information, and the network device may receive the reference signal according to other downlink control information or high-level signaling or a predefined definition.
  • S103 further includes: the network device sends a reference signal according to the downlink control information.
  • the terminal device receives a reference signal according to the downlink control information.
  • the first indication information indicates a time domain resource of the first reference signal or a time domain resource of the second reference signal, and the network device sends the reference signal according to the first indication information.
  • the first indication information indicates a time domain resource of the first reference signal or a time domain resource of the second reference signal, and the terminal device receives the reference signal according to the first indication information.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device sends a first channel according to the downlink control information. Accordingly, the network device receives the first channel.
  • the step of replacing S103 further includes: the terminal device sending a reference signal according to the downlink control information. Accordingly, the network device receives the reference signal.
  • the method may further include the step that the network device sends the first configuration information.
  • the terminal device receives first configuration information, and the first configuration information is used to configure the terminal device to support transmission of a reference signal on a time domain resource of the candidate reference signal or to configure the terminal device to support downlink control
  • the first instruction information is received in the message.
  • step S101 if the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal are configured by high-level signaling, any one of the following implementation methods may be adopted:
  • Possible implementation method 1 High-level signaling is configured for time slots.
  • the network device configures a time domain resource of the candidate reference signal for a transmission direction and / or a time slot set of the time slot.
  • configuring the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal for the transmission direction of the time slot by the network device includes: sending first high-level signaling, where the first high-level signaling is used to configure the candidate reference signal on the uplink time slot.
  • configuring the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal for the time slot set by the network device includes: sending first high-level signaling, where the first high-level signaling is used to configure the first time slot set and / or the second time
  • the time domain resources of candidate reference signals on the slot set that is, the time domain resources of different reference signals can be configured for different time slot sets.
  • a time slot set includes one or more time slots.
  • the multiple time slots may be continuous or discontinuous, which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • Possible implementation method 2 The high-level signaling is configured for the format of downlink control information.
  • the network device configures a time domain resource of the candidate reference signal for a format of downlink control information.
  • the format of the downlink control information includes DCI format 0_1, DCI format 0_0, DCI format 1_0, DCI format 1_1, and other formats may not be limited in this application.
  • the first high-level signaling is sent, the first high-level signaling is used to configure the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal corresponding to the format of the first DCI, the second high-level signaling is sent, and the second high-level signaling is used to configure Time domain resources of candidate reference signals corresponding to the format of the second DCI.
  • the terminal device may determine that the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal is the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal corresponding to the first DCI format.
  • the terminal device may determine that the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal is the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal corresponding to the format of the second DCI. That is, different downlink control information can configure time domain resources of different candidate reference signals.
  • the format of the first DCI and the format of the second DCI may be one of the foregoing DCI formats.
  • the correspondence between the pre-configured DCI format of the network device and the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal can implicitly indicate the time domain resources of different candidate reference signals through the format of the DCI, thereby achieving no further increase.
  • the range of the time domain resources indicating the reference signal is increased, the system flexibility is improved, and the system efficiency is improved.
  • URLLC high-reliability and low-latency communications
  • Possible implementation method three High-level signaling is configured for a wireless network temporary identity (RNTI).
  • RNTI wireless network temporary identity
  • the network device configures a time domain resource of a candidate reference signal for the RNTI.
  • the downlink control information must be scrambled by the RNTI before transmission.
  • the DCI scrambled by different RNTIs can be considered as different content and / or purpose.
  • the first high-level signaling is sent, the first high-level signaling is used to configure the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal corresponding to the first RNTI, the second high-level signaling is sent, and the second high-level signaling is used to configure the second Time domain resources of the candidate reference signal corresponding to the RNTI.
  • the terminal device determines that the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal is the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal corresponding to the first RNTI. Conversely, when the terminal device receives the DCI scrambled by the second RNTI, the terminal device determines that the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal is the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal corresponding to the second RNTI. That is, different downlink control information can be configured with time domain resources of different reference signals.
  • the correspondence between the pre-configured RNTI of the network device and the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal can be used to implicitly indicate the time domain resources of different candidate reference signals through the RNTI, thereby achieving no further increase in the number of bits in DCI
  • the system flexibility is improved, thereby improving the system efficiency.
  • the MCS information of the modulation and coding method in the DCI scrambled by the first RNTI corresponds to a first MCS table, and the first MCS table includes a piece of MCS information with a spectral efficiency of 0.0586.
  • the second RNTI is a type of RNTI other than the first RNTI, such as a cell radio network temporary identity (C-RNTI).
  • the first MCS table may be Table 8 or Table 9 shown below. It can be seen that the MCS index corresponding to the spectral efficiency 0.0586 in Table 8 or Table 9 is 0. The above is only an example. In other examples, the MCS information including the spectral efficiency of 0.0586 may also be in other representations, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. According to high-level signaling, the value of q in Table 9 can be 1 or 2.
  • the above-mentioned first RNTI may be referred to as a modulation coding mode cell wireless network temporary identification (Modulation, Coding scheme, C-RNTI, MCS-C-RNTI).
  • the above MCS-C-RNTI can indicate lower spectrum efficiency, that is, it may be applied to URLLC services.
  • the first RNTI can identify the service type, a more suitable time domain resource of the reference signal can be configured for the URLLC service, thereby improving the transmission efficiency of the URLLC information.
  • Possible implementation method four The high-level signaling is configured for the mapping type of the first channel.
  • the network device configures a time domain resource of the candidate reference signal for the mapping type of the first channel.
  • the first channel includes: PDSCH and / or PUSCH.
  • the mapping type of the first channel includes the mapping type A and mapping type B described above, and may also be other mapping types, which are not limited in this application.
  • the first high-level signaling is sent, the first high-level signaling is used to configure the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal corresponding to the first mapping type, the second high-level signaling is sent, and the second high-level signaling is used to configure the first Time domain resources of candidate reference signals corresponding to the two mapping types.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device receives the mapping type of the first channel as the first mapping type, the terminal device can determine that the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal corresponding to the first channel is the candidate reference corresponding to the first mapping type. The time domain resource of the signal. Conversely, when the terminal device receives the mapping type of the first channel as the second mapping type, the terminal device may determine that the time domain resource of the reference signal corresponding to the candidate of the first channel is the time domain of the candidate reference signal corresponding to the second mapping type. Resources. At present, the time domain resources of the reference signals corresponding to different mapping types are predefined. With this method, the mapping relationship between the mapping types pre-configured by the network device and the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal can be implicitly indicated by the mapping type.
  • the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal can be increased to increase the range of the time domain resources of the reference signal without further increasing the number of bits in the DCI, improving system flexibility, and thus improving system efficiency.
  • a new format of DCI may be introduced. Then, network equipment can configure time domain resources of reference signals suitable for URLLC services for DCI in this format, thereby improving the transmission efficiency of URLLC information.
  • Possible implementation method five high-level signaling is configured for a search space of downlink control information.
  • the network device configures time domain resources of candidate reference signals for a search space of downlink control information.
  • the search space of the downlink control information includes a public search space and a user search space.
  • a first high-level signaling is sent, the first high-level signaling is used to configure a time domain resource of a candidate reference signal corresponding to the first search space, a second high-level signaling is sent, and the second high-level signaling is used to configure a first Time domain resources of candidate reference signals corresponding to the two search spaces.
  • the first search space and the second search space may be the above-mentioned public search space or user search space.
  • the terminal device may determine that the time domain resource of the reference signal corresponding to the first channel candidate is the candidate reference signal corresponding to the first search space. Time domain resources.
  • the terminal device may determine that the time domain resource of the reference signal corresponding to the first channel candidate is the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal corresponding to the second search space .
  • the reference signal can be sparsely configured; if the DCI detected in the user search space is a special service, the reference signal can be densely configured.
  • the network device enables the terminal device to transmit the reference signal by selecting the time domain resource of the reference signal using the solution of the present application through the first configuration information; Or when the terminal device receives the second configuration information of the network device, and the second configuration information is used to configure that the terminal device cannot transmit the reference signal on the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal, the terminal device may use Table 1 ⁇ Table The time domain resources of the reference signal in 5 transmit the reference signal.
  • the network device enables the terminal device to support receiving the first indication information in the downlink reference signal through the first configuration information. When the terminal device does not receive the first configuration information, or the terminal device receives the first Second configuration information.
  • the second configuration information is used to configure that when the terminal device cannot receive the first indication information in the downlink reference signal, the terminal device may use the time domain resources of the reference signals in Tables 1 to 5 to receive the reference signal.
  • the transmission of the reference signal by the terminal device can be understood as sending the reference signal by the terminal device in the uplink transmission, and the receiving of the reference signal by the terminal device in the downlink transmission.
  • the first configuration information and the second configuration information are high-level signaling. Therefore, the network device can accurately indicate the time domain resources of the flexibly configured reference signal with less overhead, and the terminal device can accurately determine the information of the time domain resources of the flexibly configured reference signal, thereby improving the efficiency of system transmission.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a schematic flowchart of another communication method.
  • the method may include the following steps:
  • the terminal device obtains information of one or more time units.
  • the length of a time unit may include one or more time domain resources.
  • the one or more time units may be configured by high-level signaling, may be predefined, or may be determined according to DCI.
  • the terminal device receives high-level signaling or DCI, which is used to determine information of the one or more time units.
  • the high-level signaling or DCI may explicitly indicate the information of the one or more time units, or implicitly indicate the information of the one or more time units, which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • the high-level signaling or DCI may include a dedicated information field or a bit field for indicating information of the one or more time units.
  • the implicit indication method there is no dedicated information field or bit field in the high-level signaling or DCI to indicate the information of the one or more time units, but it can be transmitted through other information fields or bit fields. The information is obtained from the one or more time units.
  • the one or more time units may be predefined, and the terminal device obtains the information of the one or more time units that are predefined.
  • the one or more time units may include one or more of the following: a time slot where the first channel is located, a time slot adjacent to the time slot where the first channel is located, and a time slot where the first channel is located
  • the timeslots are spaced by E5 timeslots, where E5 is a non-negative integer.
  • E5 is one of 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10.
  • the value of E5 is related to the subcarrier interval index of the first channel.
  • E5 has a linear relationship with the subcarrier interval index of the first channel, for example, E5 is 1 * (subcarrier interval index of the first channel + 1), or 2 * (subcarrier interval index of the first channel) +1), or 3 * (subcarrier interval index of the first channel + 1), 4 * (subcarrier interval index of the first channel + 1), and so on.
  • a subcarrier interval of 15 kHz corresponds to a subcarrier interval index of 0
  • a subcarrier interval of 30kHz corresponds to a subcarrier interval index of 1
  • a subcarrier interval of 60kHz corresponds to a subcarrier interval of 2,120kHz.
  • the corresponding subcarrier interval index is 3.
  • the subcarrier interval and the index number may also have other corresponding relationships, which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device determines a symbol configuration set in the one or more time units according to the information of the one or more time units.
  • the one or more time units are a time domain range of the symbol configuration set.
  • the symbol configuration list (including the uplink symbol configuration list and the downlink symbol configuration list) may be a symbol configuration list that is predefined or configured in advance through high-level signaling.
  • the symbol configuration set is a subset or a complete set of the above symbol configuration list.
  • the effective symbol configuration set corresponding to each time unit in the one or more time units is unioned to obtain the symbol configuration set corresponding to the one or more time units.
  • each symbol configuration in the symbol configuration list at the same time, by comparing the validity of the symbol configuration in multiple time units corresponding to the one or more time units, it is determined whether the downlink symbol configuration is valid, thereby further A set of symbol configurations corresponding to the one or more time units composed of valid symbol configurations is determined.
  • the terminal device determines a time domain resource of the candidate reference signal according to the symbol configuration set in the one or more time units.
  • the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal may be one or more of the following symbols in the symbol configuration set: the first symbol in the symbol configuration set corresponding to the earliest symbol; and The last symbol in the symbol configuration set that corresponds to the latest starting symbol; the last symbol in the symbol configuration set that corresponds to the earliest starting symbol; the symbol in the symbol configuration set to the latest starting symbol.
  • S203 includes the steps of: dividing the symbol configuration set into one or more symbol configuration subsets, and determining a time domain resource of the candidate reference signal according to the one or more symbol configuration subsets.
  • each symbol configuration subset includes one or more symbol configurations.
  • the terminal device may divide the overlapping valid symbol configurations in the symbol configuration set into a symbol configuration subset.
  • the network device and the terminal device can group the symbol configurations in the symbol configuration set GROUP to obtain multiple symbol configuration subsets Subset (j), where j is the symbol configuration subset Subset (j) in the GROUP.
  • Index of j a non-negative integer.
  • the symbol index of the last symbol corresponding to the symbol configuration in the GROUP is n. It can be understood that the symbol index of the last symbol corresponding to the symbol configuration is determined by the index information of the starting symbol and the number of continuous symbols in the symbol configuration, that is, the symbol index of the last symbol is the index of the starting symbol and The sum of the number of continuous symbols is reduced by one.
  • Update GROUP delete the symbol configuration in the Subset (j) from the GROUP;
  • the value of update j is j plus 1.
  • the network device and the terminal device can group the symbol configurations in the symbol configuration set GROUP to obtain multiple symbol configuration subsets Subset (j), where j is the symbol configuration subset Subset (j) in the Group Index of j, a non-negative integer.
  • the symbol index of the first symbol corresponding to the symbol configuration in the GROUP is m. It can be understood that the symbol index of the first symbol corresponding to the symbol configuration is determined by the index information of the starting symbol in the symbol configuration, that is, the symbol index of the first symbol is the index of the starting symbol.
  • Update GROUP delete the symbol configuration in the Subset (j) from the GROUP;
  • the value of update j is j plus 1.
  • the group can be assigned to a temporary variable GROUP_TEMP before the grouping, and the operation of the GROUP in the above process is replaced by the operation of the GROUP_TEMP, so that the GROUP is in this grouping.
  • the process remains unchanged.
  • the symbol configuration set includes 4 symbol configurations
  • the effective symbol configuration includes PDSCH2 and PDSCH4.
  • the terminal device may divide the overlapping effective symbol configurations into a symbol configuration subset, and a time domain resource in each subset is a time domain resource of the candidate reference signal. Taking Figure 7 as an example, it is divided into 4 subsets.
  • the uplink transmission is used as an example
  • the symbol configuration subset is the uplink symbol configuration subset
  • the symbol configuration set is the uplink symbol configuration set
  • the symbol configuration is the uplink symbol configuration
  • the last symbol is the last uplink symbol.
  • the starting symbol is the starting uplink symbol.
  • the symbol configuration subset is a downlink symbol configuration subset
  • the symbol configuration set is a downlink symbol configuration set
  • the symbol configuration is a downlink symbol configuration
  • the last symbol is the last downlink symbol
  • the starting symbol starts from Beginning symbol.
  • the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal may be predefined, that is, one or more symbols in each symbol configuration subset in the symbol configuration set, or one of all symbols in the symbol configuration set. Or multiple symbols.
  • the following one or more symbols in the one or more symbol configuration subsets the first symbol in the earliest symbol configuration subset in the one or more symbol configuration sets; the one or more symbols The last symbol in the last symbol configuration subset in the configuration set; the last symbol in the earliest symbol configuration subset in the one or more symbol configuration sets; the last symbol configuration child in the one or more symbol configuration sets The first symbol in the set; the first symbol in each symbol configuration subset in the one or more symbol configuration sets; the last symbol in each symbol configuration subset in the one or more symbol configuration sets.
  • the earliest symbol configuration subset can be the symbol configuration subset with the smallest subset index number, or the symbol configuration subset with the largest subset index number, or the earliest symbol configuration subset corresponding to the starting symbol. It may be the earliest corresponding symbol configuration subset of the termination symbol.
  • the last symbol configuration subset can be the symbol configuration subset with the smallest subset index number, or the symbol configuration subset with the largest subset index number, or the symbol configuration subset corresponding to the latest starting symbol, or Is the latest symbol configuration subset corresponding to the termination symbol.
  • the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal may be configured by high-level signaling, specifically one or more symbols in each symbol configuration subset of the high-level signaling configuration in the symbol configuration set, or the symbol configuration One or more symbols from all symbols configured by high-level signaling in the set.
  • the high-level signaling may be the number of symbols in each symbol configuration subset used to determine the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal, or the number of symbols in all symbols in the symbol configuration set.
  • the network device sends downlink control information.
  • the terminal device receives downlink control information.
  • the downlink control information includes first indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate one or more of the following information: a time domain resource of a first reference signal, and the time domain resource of the first reference signal is one of the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal. Or a plurality of time domain resources; a time domain resource of a second reference signal, the time domain resource of the second reference signal being one or more symbols in a time domain resource in which the first channel is located; or the one or There are no time domain resources for reference signals on multiple time units.
  • the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal is the time domain resource determined in S203 according to the symbol configuration set in the one or more time units, or the time domain resource determined in S203 according to the one or more symbol configuration subsets.
  • the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal include multiple time domain resources. In this step, one of the time domain resources is specifically indicated by the downlink control information.
  • the method further includes S205: the network device sends the first channel according to the downlink control information.
  • the terminal device receives the first channel according to the downlink control information.
  • S205 further includes: the network device sends a reference signal according to the first instruction information.
  • the terminal device receives the reference signal according to the first instruction information.
  • the replacing step of S205 includes: the network device receives a first channel. Accordingly, the terminal device sends a first channel.
  • S205 further includes: receiving, by the network device, a reference signal according to the first instruction information.
  • the terminal device sends the reference signal according to the first instruction information.
  • an effective symbol configuration is used to determine a time domain resource of a candidate reference signal and avoid reverse symbols.
  • the position for example, the PDSCH avoids the uplink symbol and the PUSCH avoids the downlink symbol, so that a position where an effective reference signal can be sent can be flexibly determined.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a schematic flowchart of another communication method.
  • the method may include the following steps:
  • the network device sends the first information.
  • the terminal device receives the first information.
  • the first information is used to instruct the terminal device to transmit N first channels, where N is an integer greater than or equal to two.
  • the transmission channel here includes a receiving channel or a transmitting channel.
  • the first information may be downlink control information and / or high-level signaling.
  • the network device sends a first channel according to the first information, and the terminal device receives the first channel according to the first information.
  • the network device receives the first channel according to the first information, and the terminal device sends the first channel according to the first information.
  • the first channel is a PUSCH channel.
  • the terminal device In uplink transmission, S302, the terminal device sends a reference signal according to the second channel.
  • the network device receives the reference signal.
  • the second channel is the X-th first channel of the N first channels in time domain order within a time unit, where X is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and X is less than or equal to N.
  • the time unit may be one or more symbols, or may be one or more time slots, or may be a time unit in which the N first channels are located.
  • the second channel is an X-th first channel in the time domain order in each time unit among the N first channels. It can be understood that when the time domain resources of the N first channels include multiple time units, the reference signal is transmitted in the second channel in each time unit. It can be understood that the value of X corresponding to the second channel in each time unit may be the same or different.
  • S302 includes: the terminal device sends the reference signal according to the second channel and the first symbol in the time domain resource in which the second channel is located; or, S302 includes: the terminal device transmits the reference signal in the second channel according to the second channel. The first symbol before the time domain resource sends a reference signal.
  • the network device sends a reference signal according to the second channel.
  • the terminal device receives the reference signal according to the second channel.
  • S302 includes: the terminal device receives the reference signal according to the second channel and the first symbol in the time domain resource where the second channel is located; or S302 includes: the terminal device receives the reference signal according to the second channel on the second channel The first symbol before the time domain resource receives the reference signal.
  • the first symbol is a Y-th symbol in time domain order among time-domain resources where the second channel is located, Y is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1, and the number of the first symbols is less than or equal to N.
  • the time domain resource where the second channel is located is symbol 7 to symbol 11, and Y is 2, then the first symbol is symbol 8.
  • the first symbol is the Yth symbol before the time domain resource where the second channel is located, that is, the first symbol is the Yth symbol before the start symbol of the second channel, and Y is greater than or equal to 1
  • a positive integer of, the number of the first symbols is less than or equal to N.
  • the start symbol of the second channel is symbol 7, and Y is 1, then the first symbol is symbol 6.
  • the first channel indicated by the first information includes two or more first channels, and the two or more first channels carry the same transmission block, and the reference
  • the time domain resource of the signal includes a first symbol in a time domain resource in which a second channel of the two or more first channels is located; wherein the second channel is to satisfy one or more of the following conditions: First channel: the earliest first channel in the time domain, the first channel corresponding to the first redundant version, the X first channel, and X is a channel that is less than or equal to the two or more first channels number. It can be understood that the earliest first channel in the time domain can be understood as the first channel corresponding to the earliest start symbol or end symbol in the time domain.
  • the first channel corresponding to the first redundancy version can be understood as the redundancy version corresponding to the data transmitted in the first channel is the first redundancy version.
  • the first symbol is one or more of the following: the first symbol, the last symbol, and the first X1 symbols.
  • X1 is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1, and X1 is less than or equal to the number of channels of the two or more first channels.
  • the first symbol and the second channel may also be other situations, which are not limited in this application.
  • At least two of the two or more first channels have a symbol interval between the start symbols of the time domain resources where the first channels are located is less than 14 symbols.
  • the two or more first channels have at least a first channel A and a first channel B, and a start symbol of a time domain resource where the first channel A is located is a time domain resource where the first channel B is located The first symbol after the termination symbol.
  • the first information includes the number of repetitions of the first channel, and / or, information on time domain resources where one or more of the N first channels are located.
  • information about time domain resources where multiple first channels are located may be the same, and the first information may include information about time domain resources where one first channel is located.
  • Effective channels include effective uplink channels and effective downlink channels.
  • the meaning of a valid uplink channel is: if the first channel is an uplink channel, the time domain resource where the specific channel is located does not include any downlink symbol.
  • the meaning of an effective downlink channel is: if the first channel is a downlink channel, the time domain resource where the specific channel is located does not include any uplink symbol.
  • the first symbol is a valid symbol.
  • the meaning of a valid symbol is: if the first channel is an uplink channel, the first symbol should be an uplink symbol; if the first channel is a downlink channel, the first symbol should be a downlink symbol.
  • the first redundant version may be 0 and / or 3. It can be understood that when the redundancy version corresponding to the first channel is not the redundancy version 0 and / or the redundancy version 3, the time domain resource where the first channel is located may or may not have a reference signal; When the redundancy version corresponding to the first channel is redundancy version 0 and / or redundancy version 3, then the time domain resource where the first channel is located or the time domain resource where the first channel is located may have a reference signal before it.
  • redundant version 0 and redundant version 3 in the NR system are corresponding data transmissions carrying all decoded information
  • the data transmission corresponding to redundant version 0 and redundant version 3 is relatively more important, that is, the two redundant versions correspond to The first channel should carry a reference signal so that the receiving device can demodulate and decode this data transmission through the reference signal.
  • the redundancy symbol 0 corresponds to the first channel and / or the first symbol on the first channel corresponding to the redundancy version 3 transmits the DMRS.
  • the first X2 symbols before the start symbol of the time domain resource where the first channel corresponding to the redundancy version 0 and / or the first channel corresponding to the redundancy version 3 are located transmit the DMRS.
  • the reference signals are not transmitted on the first channels where the plurality of first channels do not correspond to the first redundant version.
  • the first redundant version is 1 and / or 2.
  • the first symbol in the above example may also be the X2-th symbol, and X2 is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • X2 is one or more of 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14.
  • the X2 may be a predefined or high-level signaling configuration.
  • the first symbol in the above example may also be the last symbol on a specific channel, which is not limited in this application. It can be understood that no reference signal is transmitted on other symbols of a specific channel.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device sends capability information to the network device, where the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device has part of the N first channels Ability to transmit reference signals. Accordingly, the network device receives the capability information. That is, it can be understood as the ability to transmit a reference signal in or before the time domain resource where the second channel is located. Further, the capability information may also be used to indicate that the terminal device does not have a capability of transmitting a reference signal on some of the N first channels. That is, at this time, the terminal device needs to transmit a reference signal on each of the N first channels.
  • the method further includes: sending, by the network device, second information.
  • the terminal device receives the second information.
  • the second information is used to indicate that the terminal device can transmit a reference signal on a part of the N first channels.
  • the terminal device receives third information, and the third information is used to indicate that the terminal device cannot transmit a reference signal on some of the N first channels.
  • the terminal device needs to transmit a reference signal on each of the N first channels.
  • the second information and the third information may be information in downlink control information or information in high-level signaling, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method further includes the step that the network device sends first indication information, where the first indication information is used to instruct transmission of the reference signal.
  • the terminal device receives the first instruction information. It can be understood that, in this case, if the first instruction information received by the terminal device does not indicate transmission of the reference signal, the terminal device will not transmit the reference signal on a specific channel.
  • the reference signal described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 may be one or more reference signals among candidate reference signals described in other embodiments of the present application, and a method for acquiring a time domain resource of the reference signal. Reference may be made to specific descriptions of other embodiments of the present application, and details are not described herein.
  • the first information indicates two or more first channels, and the two or more first channels are on the two or more first channels.
  • the reference signal is transmitted on the time domain resource of the reference signal in one of the second channels, so that the network device can accurately indicate the time domain resource of the reference signal with less overhead.
  • the network device / terminal device Reference signals are transmitted on domain resources, thereby improving system transmission efficiency. For example, in the scenario where the first channel is repeatedly transmitted, using the above communication method, it is not necessary to send a reference signal on each first channel, which saves system overhead. Improved transmission efficiency.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a schematic flowchart of another communication method.
  • the method may include the following steps:
  • the terminal device acquires time domain resources of candidate reference signals in one or more time units.
  • the terminal device In the downlink transmission, the terminal device needs to receive the reference signal and the network device needs to send the reference signal. In S401, the terminal device and / or the network device obtains the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal in one or more time units. Correspondingly, in the uplink transmission, the network device needs to receive the reference signal and the terminal device needs to send the reference signal, and then the network device and / or the terminal device acquires time domain resources of the candidate reference signal in one or more time units.
  • step S401 For specific implementation of step S401, reference may be made to step S101 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and details are not described herein again.
  • the network device sends downlink control information.
  • the terminal device receives downlink control information.
  • the downlink control information includes first indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate one or more of the following information:
  • a time domain resource of the first reference signal, and the time domain resource of the first reference signal is one or more time domain resources among the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal;
  • a time domain resource of a second reference signal, and the time domain resource of the second reference signal is one or more symbols in a time domain resource where the first channel is located;
  • the time domain resource used for transmitting the reference signal may be the time domain resource of the first reference signal or the time domain resource of the second reference signal.
  • the indexes of the time domain resources of the reference signals in the above Tables 1 to 5 are predefined, and the time domain resources of the candidate reference signals need to be acquired by the terminal device before receiving the reference signals.
  • step S402 The difference from the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 is that the downlink control information includes first indication information, but does not include transmission information of the first uplink channel.
  • step S402 reference may be made to step S102 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and details are not described herein again.
  • the first indication information indicates a time domain resource of the first reference signal
  • the terminal device determines that the time domain resource of the reference signal is the time domain resource of the first reference signal according to the first indication information.
  • the first indication information indicates a time domain resource of the second reference signal
  • the terminal device determines that the time domain resource of the reference signal is the time domain resource of the second reference signal according to the first indication information.
  • the first indication information indicates a time domain resource without a reference signal on the one or more time units. If the first channel is an uplink channel, the terminal device will not send a reference signal on the one or more time units. If the first channel is a downlink channel, the terminal device will not receive the reference signal on the one or more time units.
  • the method further includes: S403.
  • the network device sends a reference signal according to the downlink control information.
  • the terminal device receives a reference signal according to the downlink control information.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device sends a reference signal according to the downlink control information. Accordingly, the network device receives the reference signal.
  • step S403 For specific implementation of step S403, reference may be made to step S103 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and details are not described herein again.
  • a network device indicates a time domain resource used for transmission of a reference signal by using downlink control information, or a time domain resource without a reference signal in one or more time units.
  • the network device It can accurately indicate the time domain resources of the flexibly configured reference signals with small overhead, and the terminal device can accurately determine the information of the time domain resources of the flexibly configured reference signals, thereby improving the efficiency of system transmission.
  • the first indication information further includes an offset value between a time domain resource of the first reference signal and a time domain resource of the first channel, and the offset value includes one of the following or Multiple:
  • a symbol offset value between a termination symbol of a time domain resource of the first reference signal and a termination symbol of the first channel is a symbol offset value between a termination symbol of a time domain resource of the first reference signal and a termination symbol of the first channel.
  • the first indication information when used to indicate a time domain resource of a first reference signal, the first indication information further includes time slot information and / or symbol information.
  • the time slot information includes one or more of the following: an absolute time slot index, a time slot offset index relative to a time slot in which the first channel is located.
  • the symbol information includes one or more of the following: an absolute symbol index, a symbol offset index relative to a start symbol of the first channel, and a symbol offset index relative to a stop symbol of the first channel.
  • the time slot information is an absolute time slot index.
  • the absolute slot index is the slot index D1
  • the time domain resource of the reference signal indicated by the first indication information is one or more symbols on the slot index D1 in the one or more time units.
  • D1 is a non-negative integer.
  • the time slot information is a time slot offset index with respect to a time slot in which the first channel is located.
  • the time slot information is the D3 time slot after the time slot where the first channel is located, or the D2 time slot before the time slot where the first channel is located.
  • D2 and D3 are non-negative integers.
  • the symbol information is an absolute symbol index.
  • the first indication information indicates that the time domain resource of the first reference signal is the symbol index E1 on one or more slots in the one or more time units, that is, It can be understood that the E1 + 1th symbol on the one or more slots is a time domain resource of the reference signal indicated by the first indication information.
  • E1 is a non-negative integer, for example, E1 may be one of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, and 13.
  • the symbol information is a symbol offset index from a start symbol or an end symbol of the first channel, for example, the symbol information is a first symbol of a time domain resource in which the first channel is located, or is The last symbol of the time domain resource where the channel is located, or the first symbol after the end symbol of the time domain resource where the first channel is located, or the E2th before the start symbol of the time domain resource where the first channel is located Symbols, or the E2th symbol after the termination symbol of the time domain resource where the first channel is located.
  • E2 is a positive integer, for example, E2 can be one of 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,1 * 14,2 * 14,3 * 14 One.
  • the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal should be time domain resources in the same direction as the first channel.
  • the same direction here refers to controlling information transmission in the same direction, and the directions here include an uplink direction and a downlink direction.
  • the uplink direction refers to sending from the terminal device to the network device
  • the downlink direction refers to sending from the network device to the terminal device.
  • the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal are downlink symbols and / or downlink time slots.
  • the first symbol in the last time unit in the time sequence in the one or more time units may be understood as the first downlink in the last time unit in the time sequence in the one or more time units symbol.
  • the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal are uplink symbols and / or uplink time slots. Then, the first symbol in the earliest time unit in the time sequence in the one or more time units can be understood as the first uplink in the earliest time unit in the time sequence in the one or more time units. symbol.
  • the first channel is an uplink channel, and the network device will use the most recently received reference signal before the first channel to demodulate and decode the first channel.
  • the first channel is a downlink channel, and the terminal device will use the most recently received reference signal before the first channel to demodulate and decode the first channel.
  • the reference signal received here is a reference signal indicated by the first indication information.
  • the first channel is a downlink channel, if no reference signal is received within the E3 symbol before the start symbol of the time domain resource where the first channel is located, and / or, in the time domain where the first channel is located No reference signal is received on the symbol in the resource, and / or no reference signal is received before the E4th symbol after the end symbol of the time domain resource where the first channel is located, then the terminal device will not demodulate the first channel .
  • E3 and E4 are non-negative integers, and the values of E3 and E4 are greater than or equal to 0.
  • the values of E3 and E4 are less than or equal to the first threshold value, and the first threshold value may be one of 14, 28, 42 and 56, or other values, which are not limited in this application.
  • the decoding result of the first channel fed back by the terminal device to the network device is NACK.
  • a bit status value and / or a bit number corresponding to the first indication information needs to be further determined. Then, the network device or the terminal device may determine the first indication information according to a bit state value corresponding to the first indication information.
  • the bit status value and / or the number of bits of the first indication information are described in detail below:
  • the number of bits of the first indication information may be a positive integer greater than or equal to 1, such as 1,2,3,4,5,6.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information may be determined according to at least one of the following manners: determined by a time domain resource of a candidate reference signal, which is predefined and configured by high-level signaling.
  • the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal is determined according to the manner described in step S101, and details are not described herein again.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is related to the number of time domain resources of the candidate reference signal.
  • the terminal device or the network device may determine the number of bits of the first indication information according to the number of time domain resources of the candidate reference signal.
  • a specific implementation manner may be any one of the following implementation manners F1-F4.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is ceiling (log2 (1 + Z1)) bits. Ceiling indicates rounding up, and Z1 is the number of time domain resources of the candidate reference signal. It can be understood that 1 indicates that the information used for the indication by the first indication information further includes information on time domain resources of the second reference signal or information indicating time domain resources without reference signals. Therefore, at this time, the first indication information indicates one of 1 + Z1 pieces of information, and accordingly, the number of bits of the first indication information is ceiling (log2 (1 + Z1)). The number of bits used in this way is less, so the number of bits occupied by the first indication information can be reduced.
  • Z1 is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1, for example, Z1 can be one of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9.
  • Z1 is defined in advance, or configured by high-level signaling, or determined according to a symbol configuration set, or determined according to a symbol configuration subset, and is not limited herein.
  • n is the number of bits of the first indication information.
  • the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal may be predefined.
  • the number of time domain resources of the candidate reference signal is three.
  • the first indication information may represent one piece of information in Table 10.
  • the information corresponding to the bit status value 00 is a time domain resource with no reference signal or a second reference signal in the one or more time units; the information corresponding to the bit status value 01 is the time with the first reference signal.
  • the domain resource 1 may be, for example, the first symbol in the earliest time unit among the multiple time units; the information corresponding to the bit status value 10 is the time domain resource 2 of the first reference signal, and may be multiple times, for example.
  • the last symbol in the last time unit in the time sequence in the unit; the information corresponding to the bit status value 11 is the time domain resource 3 of the first reference signal, that is, the last in each time unit in the one or more time units A symbol.
  • Table 11 is an example of the correspondence between the bit status value of the first indication information and the information used by the first indication information for indication.
  • the information corresponding to the bit status value 11 is a time domain resource without a reference signal or a time domain resource of a second reference signal in one or more time units.
  • the time domain resources of the second reference signal can be understood as using the time domain resources corresponding to the reference signals in Tables 1 to 5.
  • the first reference information indicates the second reference signal resource, it can be understood that the reference signal is not shared at this time, that is, the time domain resource of the reference signal is determined by using the method in the prior art.
  • the correspondence between the bit status values of the first indication information in Table 10 and Table 11 and the information used for indication by the first indication information may be other correspondences.
  • the information used by the first indication information for indication is also It can be other values and is not limited here.
  • the time domain resources of the candidate reference signals may be predefined and / or configured by high-level signaling.
  • the number of time domain resources of the candidate reference signal is two.
  • the first indication information may represent one piece of information in Table 12.
  • the information corresponding to the bit status value 00 is a time domain resource with no reference signal or a second reference signal in the one or more time units; the information corresponding to the bit status value 01 is the time with the first reference signal.
  • the domain resource 1 may be, for example, the X1 symbol in multiple time units or in each time unit; the information corresponding to the bit status value 10 is the time domain resource 2 of the first reference signal, for example, may be in multiple time units Or the X2th symbol in each time unit; the information corresponding to the bit status value 11 is a reserved value.
  • the X1th symbol may also be a count of the first symbol of each frequency hopping transmission.
  • the correspondence between the bit state value of the first indication information in Table 12 and the information used for indication by the first indication information may be other correspondences, and the information used by the first indication information for indication may also be other The value is not limited here.
  • the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal may be determined according to the first channel. It can be understood that the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal may be determined according to the time domain resource of the second reference signal, and the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal is a symbol in the time domain resource of the second reference signal.
  • the time domain resources of the candidate reference signals are F0, F3, and F6, which respectively correspond to the first symbol, the fourth symbol, and the seventh symbol of the current schedule.
  • the time domain resource of the first reference signal is one of F0, F3, and F6.
  • Table 13 The correspondence between the bit status value of the first indication information and the information used for indication by the first indication information is shown in Table 13.
  • the number of time domain resources of the candidate reference signal is 3, and the first indication information may represent one piece of information in Table 13.
  • the information corresponding to the bit status value 00 is a time domain resource without a reference signal or a second reference signal in the one or more time units; the information corresponding to the bit status value 01 is a time domain of the first reference signal.
  • Domain resource 1 may be, for example, F0 (corresponding to the first symbol of the current schedule); information corresponding to the bit status value 10 is the time domain resource 2 of the first reference signal, and may be, for example, F3 (corresponding to the fourth symbol of the current schedule) ); The information corresponding to the bit status value 11 is the time domain resource 3 of the first reference signal, and may be, for example, F6 (corresponding to the currently scheduled seventh symbol).
  • the correspondence between the bit status value of the first indication information in Table 13 and the information used for indication by the first indication information may be other correspondences, and the information used by the first indication information for indication may also be other The value is not limited here.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is ceiling (log2 (2 + Z1)) bits. Ceiling indicates rounding up, and Z1 is the number of time domain resources of the candidate reference signal. It can be understood that 2 represents information of a time domain resource of the second reference signal and information of a time domain resource without a reference signal. Therefore, one of the 2 + Z1 information can be indicated by the first indication information, and the number of bits of the first indication information is ceiling (log2 (2 + Z1)). The number of bits used in this way is less, so the number of bits occupied by the first indication information can be reduced.
  • this implementation adds a bit state, that is, the information indicated by the first indication information further includes a time domain resource of the second reference signal and a time when there is no reference signal in the one or more time units.
  • Domain resource two kinds of information.
  • the information corresponding to the bit status value 00 is a time domain resource without a reference signal in the one or more time units
  • the information corresponding to the bit status value 11 is a time domain resource for the second reference signal.
  • the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal may be the above-mentioned predefined and / or configured by high-level signaling.
  • Table 14 differs from the aforementioned Tables 10 to 13 in that the bit status value 00 is used to indicate a time domain resource without a reference signal in the one or more time units, and the bit status value 11 is used to indicate a second reference signal time. Domain resources. It can be understood that the correspondence between the bit status value of the first indication information in Table 14 and the information used for indication by the first indication information may be other correspondences, and the information used by the first indication information for indication may also be other The value is not limited here.
  • n is the number of bits of the first indication information.
  • the number of time domain resources of the candidate reference signal is 4, and the first indication information may indicate one piece of information in Table 15.
  • two reserved values are added to Table 15, that is, the bit status values 101 and 110 represent two reserved values, respectively.
  • the number of time domain resources of candidate reference signals is 6, and the difference from Table 15 is that in Table 16, the time domain resources of the first reference signal may be predefined and / or High-level signaling is configured.
  • the information corresponding to the bit status value 001 is the time domain resource 1 of the first reference signal.
  • the time domain resource 1 of the first reference signal is configured by high-level signaling.
  • the time domain resources 2 to 6 of the first reference signal are predefined.
  • the time domain resource 1 of the first reference signal is the second symbol or the third symbol configured by high-level signaling.
  • the time domain resources 2 to 6 may be the first symbol after the termination symbol of the time domain resource of the first channel, or the Yth symbol on a time unit.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is 1 + Z1 bits.
  • Z1 is the number of time domain resources of the candidate reference signal. It can be understood that the information indicated by 1 as the first indication information further includes information on time domain resources of the second reference signal or information indicating time domain resources without reference signals. Therefore, at this time, 1 + Z1 pieces of information need to be indicated by the first indication information, so the number of bits of the first indication information is 1 + Z1.
  • the bits of the first indication information correspond one-to-one with 1 + Z1 pieces of information.
  • the implementation manner F3 is more flexible.
  • the network device can simultaneously notify the time domain resources of multiple candidate reference signals through the first instruction information.
  • the network device can pass the first The indication information informs the time domain resources of multiple candidate reference signals, so that the terminal device sends multiple reference signals during uplink transmission to increase the channel estimation accuracy of the network device, and the network device sends multiple reference signals to increase the terminal device during the downlink transmission. Channel estimation accuracy, thereby improving the system transmission success rate.
  • Z1 2
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is 3 bits, where 1 bit corresponds to a time domain resource with no reference signal in one or more time units or a time domain resource with a second reference signal.
  • the remaining 2 bits correspond to the time domain resource 1 of the first reference signal and the time domain resource 2 of the first reference signal, respectively.
  • the network device or the terminal device may send only one of the reference signals or both. , Or you can not send.
  • Table 17 shows an example of sending all.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is Z1 bits, or it may be ceiling (log2 (Z1)) bits.
  • the information used for the first indication here is only the time domain resource of the first reference signal.
  • the correspondence between the bit status value of the first indication information and the information used for indication by the first indication information may be other correspondences, which is not limited herein.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is related to the number of the symbol configuration subsets.
  • the terminal device or the network device may determine the number of bits of the first indication information according to the number of the symbol configuration subset.
  • a specific implementation manner may be one of the following implementation manners F5-F8.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is ceiling (log2 (1 + Z2)) bits.
  • Z2 is the number of the symbol configuration subset. It can be understood that 1 indicates that the information indicated by the first indication information includes information on a time domain resource of the second reference signal or information indicating a time domain resource without a reference signal.
  • the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal is the following one or more symbols in the one or more symbol configuration subsets, and the method in S203 is specifically referred to, and details are not described herein again.
  • the symbol configuration subset can be determined in the manner in the above steps, and is not repeated here.
  • the number of the symbol configuration subsets is three.
  • the first indication information may represent one piece of information in Table 20.
  • the information corresponding to the bit status value 00 is a time domain resource with no reference signal or a second reference signal in the one or more time units; the information corresponding to the bit status value 01 is the time with the first reference signal.
  • Domain resource 1 for example, the time domain resource 1 of the first reference signal corresponds to the first symbol configuration subset, such as the first symbol in the first symbol configuration subset; the information corresponding to the bit status value 10 is the first reference
  • the time domain resource 2 of the signal for example, the time domain resource 2 of the first reference signal corresponds to the second symbol configuration set subset, for example, it can be the first symbol in the second symbol configuration subset; the information corresponding to the bit state value 11 is the first
  • the time domain resource 3 of a reference signal for example, the time domain resource 3 of the first reference signal corresponds to a third symbol configuration set subset, for example, it may be the first symbol in the third symbol configuration subset.
  • Table 21 is an example of a corresponding relationship between the bit status value of the first indication information and the information used for the indication by the first indication information.
  • the information corresponding to the bit status value 11 is a time domain resource without a reference signal or a time domain resource of a second reference signal in the one or more time units. It can be understood that the correspondence between the bit status values of the first indication information in Tables 20 and 21 and the information used for indication by the first indication information may be other correspondences, which are not limited herein.
  • the bit status value of the first indication information may also correspond to other symbols in the first symbol configuration subset, which is not limited herein.
  • n is the number of bits of the first indication information.
  • Table 22 compared to Table 20 and Table 21, since 3 bits in Table 22 correspond to 8 states, and only 5 pieces of information can be indicated here, a bit state value is added, and the information corresponding to the bit state value is reserved value.
  • the reserved value here may be used to indicate a time domain resource without a reference signal in one or more time units.
  • the information corresponding to the bit status value 000 is the time domain resource of the second reference signal.
  • the information corresponding to the bit status value 000 may also be a time domain resource without a reference signal in one or more time units.
  • the correspondence between the bit status value of the first indication information in Table 22 and the information used for indication by the first indication information may be other correspondences, which is not limited herein.
  • the all-zero-bit state or the all-one-bit state may be a time domain resource without a reference signal or a time domain resource of a second reference signal in one or more time units.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is ceiling (log2 (2 + Z2)) bits.
  • ceiling means rounding up
  • Z2 is the number of symbol configuration subsets.
  • 2 is information indicating that the first indication information is used to indicate information including time domain resources of the second reference signal and information indicating time domain resources without the reference signal. Therefore, one of the 2 + Z2 pieces of information may be indicated by the first indication information, and the number of bits of the first indication information is ceiling (log2 (2 + Z2)). The number of bits used in this way is less, so the number of bits occupied by the first indication information can be reduced.
  • this implementation adds a state, that is, the information indicated by the first indication information includes a time domain resource of a second reference signal and a time domain resource without a reference signal in the one or more time units Two kinds of information.
  • the information corresponding to the bit status value 000 is a time domain resource without a reference signal in the one or more time units
  • the information corresponding to the bit status value 111 is a time domain resource for the second reference signal.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is 1 + Z2 bits.
  • Z2 is the number of the symbol configuration subset. It can be understood that 1 is information indicating that the first indication information is used to indicate information including time domain resources of the second reference signal or information indicating time domain resources without the reference signal. Therefore, at this time, 1 + Z2 pieces of information need to be indicated by the first indication information, so the number of bits of the first indication information is 1 + Z2.
  • the bits of the first indication information correspond one-to-one with 1 + Z2 pieces of information.
  • This indication method is flexible.
  • the network device can simultaneously notify multiple symbol configuration subsets through the first instruction information.
  • the network device can notify multiple symbol configuration subsets.
  • the network device sends multiple reference signals to increase the channel estimation accuracy of the terminal device, thereby improving the system transmission efficiency.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is Z2 bits, or it may be ceiling (log2 (Z2)) bits.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is ceiling (log2 (Z2)) bits, as shown in Table 24
  • the difference from the foregoing implementation is that the information used for the indication by the first indication information is only a subset of the symbol configuration.
  • the correspondence between the bit status value of the first indication information and the information used for indication by the first indication information may be other correspondences, which is not limited herein.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is related to the number of symbol configurations in the symbol configuration set.
  • the terminal device or the network device may determine the number of bits of the first indication information according to the number of symbol configurations in the symbol configuration set.
  • a specific implementation manner may be one of the following F9-F12.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is ceiling (log2 (1 + Z3)) bits.
  • Z3 is the number of symbol configurations in the symbol configuration set. It can be understood that 1 indicates that the information indicated by the first indication information includes information on a time domain resource of the second reference signal or information indicating a time domain resource without a reference signal. Therefore, at this time, the first indication information indicates one of 1 + Z3 pieces of information, and accordingly, the number of bits of the first indication information is ceiling (log2 (1 + Z3)). The number of bits used in this way is less, so the number of bits occupied by the first indication information can be reduced.
  • the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal may be one or more of the following symbols in the symbol configuration set: the first symbol in the earliest symbol configuration in the symbol configuration set; the symbol The last symbol in the last symbol configuration in the configuration set; the last symbol in the earliest symbol configuration in the symbol configuration set; the first symbol in the last symbol configuration in the symbol configuration set; the symbol configuration The first symbol in each symbol configuration in the set; the last symbol in each symbol configuration in the symbol configuration set.
  • the earliest symbol configuration can be the symbol configuration with the smallest symbol configuration index number, or the symbol configuration with the largest symbol configuration index number, or the symbol configuration corresponding to the earliest starting symbol, or the earliest symbol corresponding to the terminating symbol.
  • the final symbol configuration can be the symbol configuration with the smallest symbol configuration index number, or the symbol configuration with the largest symbol configuration index number, or the symbol configuration corresponding to the latest starting symbol, or the symbol corresponding to the latest ending symbol. Configuration.
  • the number of symbol configurations in the symbol configuration set is three.
  • the first indication information may represent one piece of information in Table 26.
  • the information corresponding to the bit status value 00 is a time domain resource with no reference signal or a second reference signal in the one or more time units; the information corresponding to the bit status value 01 is the time with the first reference signal.
  • the domain resource 1 may be, for example, the first symbol configuration; the information corresponding to the bit status value 10 is the time domain resource 2 of the first reference signal; for example, it may be the second symbol configuration; the information corresponding to the bit status value 11 is the first
  • the time domain resource 3 of the reference signal may be, for example, a third symbol configuration.
  • Table 27 is an example of a corresponding relationship between the bit status value of the first indication information and the information used for the indication by the first indication information.
  • the information corresponding to the bit status value 11 is a time domain resource of the second reference signal.
  • the time domain resource of the second reference signal may be the same as that described in the foregoing manner, and will not be repeated here. It can be understood that the correspondence between the bit status values of the first indication information in Table 26 and Table 27 and the information used for indication by the first indication information may be other correspondences, which are not limited herein.
  • n is the number of bits of the first indication information.
  • Table 28 An example is shown in Table 28. Different from Table 26 and Table 27, since 3 bits in Table 28 correspond to 8 states, and only 5 pieces of information can be indicated here, bit state values 101, 110, and 111 are added to correspond to reserved values.
  • the reserved value may be used to indicate time domain resources without reference signals in one or more time units, and of course, other information may also be indicated.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is ceiling (log2 (2 + Z3)) bits.
  • Z3 is the number of symbol configurations in the symbol configuration set. It can be understood that 2 is information indicating that the first indication information is used for indication, including information indicating time domain resources of the second reference signal and information indicating time domain resources without the reference signal. Therefore, one of the 2 + Z3 pieces of information may be indicated by the first indication information, and the number of bits of the first indication information is ceiling (log2 (2 + Z3)). The number of bits used in this way is less, so the number of bits occupied by the first indication information can be reduced.
  • this implementation adds a state, that is, the information indicated by the first indication information includes a time domain resource of a second reference signal and a time domain resource without a reference signal in the one or more time units.
  • Two kinds of information For example, in Table 29, the information corresponding to the bit status value 00 is a time domain resource without a reference signal in the one or more time units, and the information corresponding to the bit status value 11 is a time domain resource of the second reference signal.
  • n is the number of bits of the first indication information.
  • the number of symbol configurations is 4, and the first indication information may represent one piece of information in Table 30.
  • two reserved values are added, that is, the bit status values 101 and 110 represent two reserved values, respectively.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is 1 + Z3 bits.
  • Z3 is the number of symbol configurations in the symbol configuration set. It can be understood that 1 indicates that the information indicated by the first indication information includes information on a time domain resource of the second reference signal or information indicating a time domain resource without a reference signal. Therefore, at this time, 1 + Z3 pieces of information need to be indicated by the first indication information, so the number of bits of the first indication information is 1 + Z3.
  • the bits of the first indication information correspond to the 1 + Z3 information one by one. This indication method is flexible.
  • the network device can simultaneously notify the time domain resources of multiple reference signals through the first indication information.
  • the network device can notify the time domain resources of multiple reference signals, so that the terminal device sends multiple reference signals during uplink transmission to increase the channel estimation accuracy of the network device, and the network device sends Multiple reference signals increase the channel estimation accuracy of the terminal equipment, thereby improving the system transmission efficiency.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is Z3 bits, or it may be ceiling (log2 (Z3)) bits.
  • the number of bits of the first indication information is ceiling (log2 (Z3)) bits, as shown in Table 31, the difference from the foregoing implementation is that the information used for the indication in the first indication is only the symbol configuration in the symbol configuration set. .
  • the correspondence between the bit status value of the first indication information and the information used for indication by the first indication information may be other correspondences, which is not limited herein.
  • a bit state value corresponding to the first indication information is further related to a time sequence of a time domain resource of the first reference signal in a time domain resource of the candidate reference signal.
  • One possible implementation method may be from morning to night.
  • the time domain resources in the time domain resources of the candidate reference signals can be sorted according to time from morning to night, which can be understood as first to last.
  • the time domain resources of the sorted candidate reference signals correspond to the bit state value values of the bits of the first indication information.
  • the bit state value corresponding to the time domain resource of the earlier time is smaller than the time domain resource corresponding to the later time Bit status value.
  • the time domain resource 1 of the first reference signal is earlier than the time domain resource 2 of the first reference signal can be understood as: the start time of the time domain resource 1 of the first reference signal is earlier than the first Time domain resource 2 of the reference signal. Similarly, the time domain resource 2 of the first reference signal is earlier than the time domain resource 3 of the first reference signal.
  • the information corresponding to the bit status value 01 is the time domain resource 1 of the first reference signal
  • the information corresponding to the bit status value 10 is the time domain resource 2 of the first reference signal.
  • the information corresponding to the state value 11 is the time domain resource 3 of the first reference signal.
  • the time sequence may be from night to morning.
  • the time domain resources in the time domain resources of the candidate reference signals can be sorted from time to time from late to early, which can be understood as from back to first.
  • the time domain resources of the sorted candidate reference signals correspond to the bit status values of the bits of the first indication information, specifically, the bit status values corresponding to the time domain resources of the later time are smaller than the time domain resources corresponding to the earlier time domain resources. Bit status value.
  • the first indication information when used to indicate a time domain resource of the first reference signal, a bit state value corresponding to the first indication information and a time domain resource where the first reference signal is located
  • the chronological order of symbol configuration is related.
  • the bit state value corresponding to the first indication information is related to the time sequence of the time domain resource of the first reference signal in the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal, and details are not described again.
  • the bit status value corresponding to the first indication information is further related to an index of a time domain resource of the first reference signal in a symbol configuration subset or a symbol configuration index.
  • the first indication information when used to indicate a time domain resource of the first reference signal, a bit state value corresponding to the first indication information and a time domain resource where the first reference signal is located Indexes of a subset of symbol configurations are related.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a time domain resource of the first reference signal
  • a bit state value corresponding to the first indication information and a time domain resource where the first reference signal is located The index of the symbol configuration is related.
  • the bit status value corresponding to the first indication information is related to the index number of the symbol configuration subset in which the time domain resources of the first reference signal are located in the symbol configuration set.
  • bit state value is from small to large and the corresponding index number is from small to large.
  • symbol configuration subset in the symbol configuration set can be sorted according to the index number from small to large, which can be understood as ascending order.
  • the sorted symbol configuration subsets correspond to the bit state value values of the bits of the first indication information, specifically, the symbol configuration subsets with a lower index number correspond to the bit configuration values corresponding to a smaller index configuration subset. The value of the bit status value.
  • bit state value is from small to large and the corresponding index number is from large to small.
  • symbol configuration subset in the symbol configuration set can be sorted according to the index number from large to small, which can be understood as descending order.
  • the sorted symbol configuration subsets correspond to the bit state value values of the bits of the first indication information, specifically, the symbol configuration subsets with the larger index numbers correspond to the bit configuration values of the smaller index configuration subsets.
  • the value of the bit status value is from small to large and the corresponding index number is from large to small.
  • a bit status value corresponding to the first indication information is predefined or configured by high-level signaling.
  • this bit state value is defined in advance as a state value of all zeros or a bit state value of all ones.
  • the bit status value corresponding to the first indication information is predefined or configured by high-level signaling.
  • this bit state value is defined in advance as a state value of all zeros or a bit state value of all ones. It may also be that there is no reference signal on the one or more time units indicated by a default value or a reserved value in the bit status value.
  • the two bit status values here The values are different.
  • no reference signal on the one or more time units corresponds to a state value of all zeros
  • a time domain resource of the second reference signal corresponds to a state value of all ones.
  • no reference signal on the one or more time units corresponds to a state value of all 1s
  • a time domain resource of the second reference signal corresponds to a state value of all zeros.
  • the time domain resources of the candidate reference signals mentioned in this embodiment may be configured by high-level signaling, or may be defined in advance; or may be determined by a symbol configuration set, and a detailed description of each implementation manner may be Reference is made to relevant content of other embodiments of the present application, such as the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and details are not described herein.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device 1000, which can be applied to the communication method shown in FIG. 3 described above.
  • the communication device 1000 may be a terminal device 200 as shown in FIG. 1, or may be a component (such as a chip) applied to the terminal device 200.
  • the communication device 1000 includes a processing unit 11 and a transceiver unit 12. among them:
  • a processing unit 11 configured to obtain time domain resources of candidate reference signals in one or more time units
  • the transceiver unit 12 is configured to receive downlink control information, where the downlink control information includes first indication information and transmission information of a first channel, and the first indication information is used to indicate one or more of the following information:
  • Time domain resources of the first reference signal, and the time domain resources of the first reference signal are one or more time domain resources of the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal;
  • a time domain resource of a second reference signal, and the time domain resource of the second reference signal is one or more symbols in a time domain resource where the first channel is located;
  • the time domain resource of the candidate reference signal includes a time domain resource determined according to a symbol configuration set in the one or more time units:
  • the processing unit 11 is further configured to divide the symbol configuration set into one or more symbol configuration subsets.
  • the processing unit 11 is further configured to determine a time domain resource of a candidate reference signal according to the one or more symbol configuration subsets.
  • the transceiver unit 12 is configured to receive first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure a network device to support transmission of a reference signal on a time domain resource of the candidate reference signal.
  • processing unit 11 and the transceiver unit 12 For a more detailed description of the processing unit 11 and the transceiver unit 12, reference may be directly made to the related description of the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 3 above, and details are not described herein.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device 2000, which can be applied to the communication method shown in FIG. 3 described above.
  • the communication device 2000 may be the network device 100 shown in FIG. 1, or may be a component (such as a chip) applied to the network device 100.
  • the communication device 2000 includes a transceiver unit 21. among them:
  • the transceiver unit 21 is configured to send downlink control information, where the downlink control information includes first indication information and transmission information of a first channel, and the first indication information is used to indicate one or more of the following information:
  • Time domain resources of the first reference signal, and the time domain resources of the first reference signal are one or more time domain resources of the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal;
  • a time domain resource of a second reference signal, and the time domain resource of the second reference signal is one or more symbols in a time domain resource where the first channel is located;
  • the transceiver unit 21 is further configured to transmit a reference signal according to the first instruction information.
  • the transceiver unit 21 is further configured to send first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure a network device to support transmission of a reference signal on a time domain resource of the candidate reference signal.
  • transceiver unit 21 may be directly obtained by directly referring to the related description of the network device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and is not described herein.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device 3000, which can be applied to the communication method shown in FIG. 5 described above.
  • the communication device 3000 may be a terminal device 200 as shown in FIG. 1, or may be a component (such as a chip) applied to the terminal device 200.
  • the communication device 3000 includes a transceiver unit 31 and a processing unit 32. among them:
  • the transceiver unit 31 is configured to acquire information of one or more time units.
  • the processing unit 32 is configured to determine a symbol configuration set in the one or more time units according to the information of the one or more time units.
  • the processing unit 32 is further configured to determine a time domain resource of the candidate reference signal according to the symbol configuration set in the one or more time units.
  • the transceiver unit 31 is further configured to receive downlink control information.
  • the transceiver unit 31 is further configured to transmit a first channel and a reference signal according to the downlink control information.
  • the processing unit 32 is further configured to divide the symbol configuration set into one or more symbol configuration subsets, and determine candidate reference signals according to the one or more symbol configuration subsets. Time domain resources.
  • transceiver unit 31 and processing unit 32 For a more detailed description of the foregoing transceiver unit 31 and processing unit 32, reference may be directly made to the related description of the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5 above, and details are not described herein.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device 4000, which can be applied to the communication method shown in FIG. 5 described above.
  • the communication device 4000 may be the network device 100 shown in FIG. 1, or may be a component (such as a chip) applied to the network device 100.
  • the communication device 4000 includes a transceiver unit 41. among them:
  • the transceiver unit 41 is configured to send downlink control information.
  • the transceiver unit 41 is further configured to transmit a first channel and a reference signal according to the downlink control information.
  • transceiver unit 41 may be directly obtained by directly referring to the related description of the network device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5, and is not described herein.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device 5000, which can be applied to the communication method shown in FIG. 8.
  • the communication device 5000 may be a terminal device 200 as shown in FIG. 1, or may be a component (such as a chip) applied to the terminal device 200.
  • the communication device 5000 includes a transceiver unit 51. among them:
  • the transceiver unit 51 is configured to receive the first information.
  • the first information is used to instruct the terminal device to transmit N first channels, where N is an integer greater than or equal to two.
  • the transceiver unit 51 is further configured to transmit a reference signal according to a second channel.
  • the second channel is the X-th first channel of the N first channels in time domain order within a time unit, where X is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and X is less than or equal to N.
  • the transceiver unit 51 is further configured to send capability information to a network device, where the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device has a capability of transmitting reference signals on some of the N first channels. .
  • the transceiver unit 51 is further configured to receive second information, where the second information is used to indicate that the terminal device can transmit a reference signal on some of the N first channels.
  • the transceiver unit 51 is further configured to receive third information, where the third information is used to indicate that the terminal device cannot transmit a reference signal on some of the N first channels.
  • transceiver unit 51 can be directly obtained by directly referring to the related description of the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 8, and is not described herein.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device 6000, which can be applied to the communication method shown in FIG. 8 described above.
  • the communication device 6000 may be the network device 100 shown in FIG. 1, or may be a component (such as a chip) applied to the network device 100.
  • the communication device 6000 includes a transceiver unit 61. among them:
  • the transceiver unit 61 is configured to send first information.
  • the first information is used to instruct the terminal device to transmit N first channels, where N is an integer greater than or equal to two.
  • the transceiver unit 61 is further configured to transmit a reference signal according to a second channel.
  • the second channel is the X-th first channel of the N first channels in time domain order within a time unit, where X is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and X is less than or equal to N.
  • the transceiver unit 61 is further configured to receive capability information from the terminal device, where the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device has a transmission reference on some of the N first channels. Signal capabilities.
  • the transceiver unit 61 is further configured to send second information, where the second information is used to indicate that the terminal device can transmit a reference signal on some of the N first channels.
  • the transceiver unit 61 is further configured to send third information, where the third information is used to indicate that the terminal device cannot transmit a reference signal on some of the N first channels.
  • transceiver unit 61 may be directly obtained by directly referring to the related description of the network device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 8, and is not described herein.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device 7000, which can be applied to the communication method shown in FIG. 9 described above.
  • the communication device 7000 may be a terminal device 200 as shown in FIG. 1, or may be a component (such as a chip) applied to the terminal device 200.
  • the communication device 7000 includes a transceiver unit 71. among them:
  • the transceiver unit 71 is configured to acquire time domain resources of candidate reference signals in one or more time units.
  • the transceiver unit 71 is further configured to receive downlink control information.
  • the downlink control information includes first indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate one or more of the following information:
  • a time domain resource of the first reference signal, and the time domain resource of the first reference signal is one or more time domain resources among the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal;
  • a time domain resource of a second reference signal, and the time domain resource of the second reference signal is one or more symbols in a time domain resource where the first channel is located;
  • the transceiver unit 71 is further configured to transmit a reference signal according to the downlink control information.
  • transceiver unit 71 may be directly obtained by directly referring to the related description of the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 9, and is not described herein.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device 8000, which can be applied to the communication method shown in FIG. 9.
  • the communication device 8000 may be the network device 100 shown in FIG. 1, or may be a component (such as a chip) applied to the network device 100.
  • the communication device 8000 includes a transceiver unit 81. among them:
  • the transceiver unit 81 is further configured to send downlink control information.
  • the downlink control information includes first indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate one or more of the following information:
  • a time domain resource of the first reference signal, and the time domain resource of the first reference signal is one or more time domain resources among the time domain resources of the candidate reference signal;
  • Time domain resources of the second reference signal, and the time domain resources of the second reference signal are one or more symbols in the time domain resources where the first channel is located;
  • the transceiver unit 81 is further configured to transmit a reference signal according to the downlink control information.
  • transceiver unit 81 may be directly obtained by directly referring to the related description of the network device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 9, and is not described herein.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device, where the communication device is configured to execute the foregoing communication method.
  • Some or all of the above communication methods may be implemented by hardware or software.
  • the communication device may be a chip or an integrated circuit in a specific implementation.
  • the communication device when part or all of the communication method in the above embodiment is implemented by software, the communication device includes: a memory for storing a program; a processor for executing the program stored in the memory; and when the program is executed, The communication device can implement the communication method provided by the foregoing embodiment.
  • the foregoing memory may be a physically independent unit, or may be integrated with a processor.
  • the communication device may also include only a processor.
  • the memory for storing the program is located outside the communication device, and the processor is connected to the memory through a circuit / wire for reading and executing the program stored in the memory.
  • the processor may be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), or a combination of a CPU and an NP.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • NP network processor
  • the processor may further include a hardware chip.
  • the hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD), or a combination thereof.
  • the PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a general array logic (GAL), or any combination thereof.
  • the memory may include volatile memory (for example, random-access memory (RAM); the memory may also include non-volatile memory (for example, flash memory) , Hard disk (HDD) or solid-state drive (SSD); the storage may also include a combination of the above types of storage.
  • volatile memory for example, random-access memory (RAM)
  • non-volatile memory for example, flash memory
  • HDD Hard disk
  • SSD solid-state drive
  • the storage may also include a combination of the above types of storage.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a simplified terminal device. It is easy to understand and easy to illustrate.
  • the terminal device uses a mobile phone as an example.
  • the terminal device may include a processor.
  • the processor is configured to implement the method performed by the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the processor is mainly used for processing communication protocols and communication data, controlling terminal devices, executing software programs, and processing data of the software programs.
  • the terminal device may further include a memory, and the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the terminal device may further include any one of a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input / output device.
  • the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for converting baseband signals and radio frequency signals and processing the radio frequency signals.
  • the antenna is mainly used for receiving and transmitting radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices, such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc. are mainly used to receive data input by the user and output data to the user. It should be noted that some types of terminal equipment may not have an input / output device.
  • the terminal device includes a processor and a transceiver.
  • a processor is coupled to the transceiving device, and the processor is configured to execute a computer program or instruction to control the receiving and sending of information by the transceiving device; when the processor executes the computer program or instruction, the processing
  • the device is also used to implement the method performed by the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment.
  • an antenna and a radio frequency circuit having a transmitting and receiving function may be regarded as a receiving unit and a transmitting unit (also collectively referred to as a transmitting and receiving unit) of a terminal device, and a processor having a processing function may be regarded as a processing unit of the terminal device .
  • the terminal device includes a transceiver unit 91 and a processing unit 92.
  • the transceiver unit 91 may also be referred to as a receiver / transmitter, a receiver / transmitter, a receive / transmit circuit, and the like.
  • the processing unit 92 may also be referred to as a processor, a processing single board, a processing module, a processing device, and the like.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to perform step S101 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3; and the transceiver unit 91 is configured to perform functions of the terminal device in steps S102 and S103 in the embodiment shown in FIG. .
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to execute steps S201 to S203 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5; and the transceiver unit 91 is configured to execute steps S204 and S205 in the embodiment shown in FIG. Capabilities of the terminal equipment.
  • the transceiver unit 91 is configured to perform the function of the terminal device in step S301 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8; and the processing unit 92 is configured to perform step S302 in the embodiment shown in FIG. .
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to perform step S401 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9; and the transceiver unit 91 is configured to perform functions of the terminal device in step S402 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 .
  • the terminal device includes a processor and a memory, and the memory stores a computer program or instruction.
  • the processor executes the computer program or instruction, the processor is configured to implement the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment. The method performed.
  • the processor When it is necessary to send data, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to a radio frequency circuit. After the radio frequency circuit processes the baseband signal, the radio frequency signal is sent out through an antenna as an electromagnetic wave.
  • the RF circuit receives the RF signal through the antenna, converts the RF signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor.
  • the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • FIG. 19 In an actual terminal equipment product, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device.
  • the memory may be set independently of the processor or integrated with the processor, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • a communication device which includes a processor and a transceiving device, the processor is coupled to the transceiving device, and the processor is configured to execute a computer program or instruction to control the transceiving device to perform information processing. Receiving and sending; when the processor executes the computer program or instruction, the processor is further configured to implement the method executed by the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • FIG. 20 shows a simplified structural diagram of a network device.
  • the network equipment includes a radio frequency signal transceiving and converting section and a 202 section, and the radio frequency signal transceiving and converting section further includes a transceiving unit 201 section.
  • the radio frequency signal transmission and reception and conversion part is mainly used for radio frequency signal transmission and reception and the conversion of radio frequency signal and baseband signal; 202 part is mainly used for baseband processing and control of network equipment.
  • the transceiver unit 201 may also be referred to as a receiver / transmitter, a receiver / transmitter, a receive / transmit circuit, and the like.
  • Part 202 is usually a control center of a network device, which may be generally referred to as a processing unit, and is used to control the network device to perform the steps performed on the network device in FIG. 3, FIG. 5, FIG. 8, or FIG. 9.
  • a control center of a network device which may be generally referred to as a processing unit, and is used to control the network device to perform the steps performed on the network device in FIG. 3, FIG. 5, FIG. 8, or FIG. 9.
  • a control center of a network device which may be generally referred to as a processing unit, and is used to control the network device to perform the steps performed on the network device in FIG. 3, FIG. 5, FIG. 8, or FIG. 9.
  • the transceiver unit 201 is configured to perform the functions of the network device in steps S102 and S103 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3.
  • the transceiver unit 201 is configured to perform functions of the network device in steps S204 and S205 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5.
  • the transceiver unit 201 is configured to execute the function of the network device in step S301 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8.
  • the transceiver unit 201 is configured to perform the functions of the network device in steps S402 and S403 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9.
  • a communication device including a processor, and the processor is configured to implement the method performed by the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • a communication device including a processor and a memory, where the memory stores a computer program or instruction, and when the processor executes the computer program or instruction, the processor is configured to implement the foregoing The method executed by the network device in the method embodiment.
  • part 202 may include one or more single boards, and each single board may include one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the processors are used to read and execute programs in the memory to implement the baseband. Processing functions and control of network equipment. If there are multiple boards, the boards can be interconnected to increase processing capacity.
  • multiple single boards may share one or more processors, or multiple single boards may share one or more memories, or multiple single boards may share one or more processes at the same time.
  • Device may share one or more processors, or multiple single boards may share one or more memories, or multiple single boards may share one or more processes at the same time.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program or instruction. When the computer program or instruction is executed, the method in the foregoing embodiment is implemented.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system including the terminal device and the network device in the foregoing embodiments.
  • the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other ways.
  • the division of the unit is only a logical function division.
  • multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not. carried out.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling, or direct coupling, or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be electrical, mechanical, or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, which may be located in one place, or may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objective of the solution of this embodiment.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted through a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer instructions can be transmitted from one website site, computer, server, or data center to another via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.)
  • wired such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)
  • wireless such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, and the like that includes one or more available medium integrations.
  • the available medium may be a read-only memory (ROM), or a random access memory (RAM), or a magnetic medium, such as a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape, a magnetic disk, or an optical medium, such as, A digital versatile disc (DVD), or a semiconductor medium, such as a solid state disk (SSD).
  • ROM read-only memory
  • RAM random access memory
  • magnetic medium such as a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape, a magnetic disk, or an optical medium, such as, A digital versatile disc (DVD), or a semiconductor medium, such as a solid state disk (SSD).
  • SSD solid state disk

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请公开了一种通信方法及装置。该方法包括：获取一个或多个时间单元中候选的参考信号的时域资源；接收下行控制信息，下行控制信息包括第一指示信息和第一信道的传输信息，第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：第一参考信号的时域资源，第一参考信号的时域资源为候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域资源；第二参考信号的时域资源，第二参考信号的时域资源为第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源。网络设备能够以较小的开销，准确地指示灵活配置的参考信号的时域资源，终端设备能够准确地确定灵活配置的参考信号的时域资源的信息，从而提高了系统传输的效率。

Description

通信方法及装置
本申请要求于2018年9月7日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为201811042617.4、发明名称为“通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。
背景技术
目前，新无线(new radio，NR)系统上行或下行传输中采用灵活的时域资源的方式。具体地，NR系统支持物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel，PDSCH),物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel，PUSCH)，物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)或物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel，PUCCH)的时域资源的长度可以被设置为多种的符号长度。在上行或下行传输时，需要传输参考信号(reference signal，RS)，用于对信道进行估计。
但目前NR系统中对于同一个符号长度的上行或下行传输中的参考信号的位置是预先定义或高层信令通知的，这样参考信号的位置不变或只能缓慢改变，并不适用于快速变化的信道情况和系统需求。因此，需要解决在NR系统中如何以较小的参考信号的开销，准确地指示参考信号的时域资源的问题，以提高系统传输效率。
发明内容
本申请提供一种通信方法及装置，以较小的开销准确地指示灵活配置的参考信号的时域资源。
第一方面，提供了一种通信方法，包括：获取一个或多个时间单元中候选的参考信号的时域资源；以及接收下行控制信息，所述下行控制信息包括第一指示信息和第一信道的传输信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域资源；第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源。
在该方面中，网络设备能够以较小的开销，准确地指示灵活配置的参考信号的时域资源，终端设备能够准确地确定灵活配置的参考信号的时域资源的信息，从而提高了系统传输的效率。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，当所述候选的参考信号的时域资源包括根据在所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合确定的时域资源时，所述方法还包括：将所述符号配置集合划分为一个或多个符号配置子集；以及根据所述一个或多个符号配置子集，确定候选的参考信号的时域资源。
在该实现方式中，通过划分符号配置子集，可以根据符号配置子集确定候选的参考信 号的时域资源，第一指示信息仅需指示符号配置子集，即可确定对应的候选的参考信号的时域资源，从而节省了第一指示信息的开销。
结合第一方面，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：接收第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息用于配置终端设备支持参考信号在所述候选的参考信号的时域资源上传输。
在该实现方式中，网络设备通过第一配置信息使能终端设备采用本申请的方案选择参考信号的时域资源传输参考信号。
结合第一方面，在又一种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：接收第二配置信息，所述第二配置信息终端设备支持所述第一信道的时域资源上不存在参考信号。
在该实现方式中，在当终端设备接收到第二配置信息后，则终端设备接收到的第一指示信息可以指示所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源。
第二方面，提供了一种通信方法，包括：发送下行控制信息，所述下行控制信息包括第一指示信息和第一信道的传输信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域资源；第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源；以及根据所述第一指示信息，传输参考信号。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，当所述候选的参考信号的时域资源包括根据在所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合确定的时域资源时，所述方法还包括：将所述符号配置集合划分为一个或多个符号配置子集；以及根据所述一个或多个符号配置子集，确定候选的参考信号的时域资源。
结合第二方面，在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：发送第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息用于配置网络设备支持参考信号在所述候选的参考信号的时域资源上传输。
结合第二方面，在又一种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：发送第二配置信息，所述第二配置信息终端设备支持所述第一信道的时域资源上不存在参考信号。
第三方面，提供了一种通信方法，包括：终端设备获取一个或多个时间单元的信息；所述终端设备根据所述一个或多个时间单元的信息，确定所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合；所述终端设备根据所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合，确定候选的参考信号的时域资源；所述终端设备接收下行控制信息，所述下行控制信息包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域资源；第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源；所述终端设备根据所述下行控制信息传输第一信道和参考信号。
在该方面中，在NR系统中灵活配置多种PUSCH或PDSCH长度的情况下，使用有效的符号配置来确定候选的参考信号的时域资源，避开反向的符号位置(例如对应PDSCH避开上行符号，对于PUSCH避开下行符号)，从而可以灵活改变参考信号的位置。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述终端设备根据所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合，确定候选的参考信号的时域资源，包括：将所述符号配置集合划分为一个或多个符号配置子集，并根据所述一个或多个符号配置子集，确定候选的参考信号的时域资源。
第四方面，提供了一种通信方法，包括：网络设备发送下行控制信息，所述下行控制信息包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域资源；第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源；所述网络设备根据所述下行控制信息传输第一信道和参考信号。
第五方面，提供了一种通信方法，包括：终端设备接收第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示所述终端设备传输N个第一信道；所述终端设备根据第二信道传输参考信号，其中，所述第二信道为所述N个第一信道中在一个时间单元内按时域顺序的第X个第一信道，其中，X为大于或等于1的整数，N为大于或等于2的整数，且X小于或等于N，所述参考信号的时域资源在所述第二信道所在的时域资源之中或者所述参考信号的时域资源在所述第二信道所在的时域资源之前。
在该方面中，通过根据网络设备发送的第一信息，该第一信息指示两个或两个以上的第一信道，在该两个或两个以上的第一信道中的一个第二信道中的参考信号的时域资源上传输参考信号，从而网络设备能够以较小的开销，准确地指示参考信号的时域资源，网络设备/终端设备在该参考信号的时域资源上传输参考信号，从而提高了系统传输的效率。
结合第五方面，在第一种可能的实现方式中，所述终端设备根据第二信道传输参考信号，包括：所述终端设备根据第二信道，在所述第二信道所在的时域资源中的第一符号传输所述参考信号；或者所述终端设备根据第二信道，在所述第二信道所在的时域资源之前的第一符号传输所述参考信号；其中，所述第一符号为按时域顺序的第Y个符号，Y为大于或等于1的正整数，所述第一符号的数量小于或等于N。
在该实现方式中，具体确定传输参考信号的符号，该符号可以是预先定义的。
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式，在第二种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述终端设备向网络设备发送能力信息，所述能力信息用于指示所述终端设备具有在N个第一信道中的部分信道上传输参考信号的能力。
在该实现方式中，终端设备向网络设备上报能力信息，从而网络设备可以根据终端设备的能力给终端设备配置用于传输参考信号的第二信道。
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第五方面的第二种可能的实现方式，在第三种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括，所述终端设备接收第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述终端设备在N个第一信道中的部分信道上传输参考信号。
第六方面，提供了一种通信方法，包括：网络设备发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示所述终端设备传输N个第一信道；所述网络设备根据第二信道传输参考信号，其中，所述第二信道为所述N个第一信道中在一个时间单元内按时域顺序的第X个第一信道，其中，X为大于或等于1的整数，N为大于或等于2的整数，且X小于或等于N，所述参考 信号的时域资源在所述第二信道所在的时域资源之中或者所述参考信号的时域资源在所述第二信道所在的时域资源之前。
结合第六方面，在第一种可能的实现方式中，所述网络设备根据第二信道传输参考信号，包括：所述网络设备根据第二信道，在所述第二信道所在的时域资源中的第一符号传输所述参考信号；或者所述网络设备根据第二信道，在所述第二信道所在的时域资源之前的第一符号传输所述参考信号；其中，所述第一符号为按时域顺序的第Y个符号，Y为大于或等于1的正整数，所述第一符号的数量小于或等于N。
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式，在第二种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：所述网络设备接收来自所述终端设备的能力信息，所述能力信息用于指示所述终端设备具有在N个第一信道中的部分信道上传输参考信号的能力。
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第五方面的第二种可能的实现方式，在第三种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括，所述网络设备发送第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述终端设备可以N个第一信道中的部分信道上传输参考信号。
结合第五方面或第六方面或第五方面、第六方面的任一种实现方式，在第四种可能的实现方式中，所述N个第一信道承载相同的传输块。
在该实现方式中，在重复传输第一信道的场景下，无需在每个第一信道上发送参考信号，节约了系统开销，提升了传输效率。
结合第五方面或第六方面或第五方面、第六方面的任一种实现方式，在第五种可能的实现方式中，所述第二信道对应第一冗余版本。
结合第五种可能的实现方式，在第六种可能的实现方式中，所述第一冗余版本为冗余版本0和/或冗余版本3。
在该实现方式中，由于NR系统中冗余版本0和冗余版本3是对应携带全部解码信息的数据传输，因此冗余版本0和冗余版本3对应的数据传输相对更加重要，即这两个冗余版本对应的第一信道上应携带参考信号，以便接收设备通过参考信号解调译码此数据传输。
结合第五方面或第六方面或第五方面、第六方面的任一种实现方式，在第七种可能的实现方式中，所述第二信道为所述N个第一信道中在每个时间单元内的按时域顺序的第X个第一信道。
结合第五方面或第六方面或第五方面、第六方面的任一种实现方式，在第八种可能的实现方式中，所述N个第一信道中，相邻的两个第一信道所在时域资源的起始符号之间的符号间隔小于14个符号，或者所述N个第一信道中，相邻的两个第一信道中后一个第一信道所在时域资源的起始符号是前一个第一信道所在时域资源的终止符号之后的第一个符号。
结合第五方面或第六方面或第五方面、第六方面的任一种实现方式，在第九种可能的实现方式中，所述第一信道为有效的上行信道，所述有效的上行信道所在的时域资源不包括任意一个下行符号；或者所述第一信道为有效的下行信道，所述有效的下行信道所在的时域资源不包括任意一个上行符号。
结合第五方面或第六方面或第五方面、第六方面的任一种实现方式，在第十种可能的实现方式中，当所述第一信道为上行信道，所述第一符号为上行符号；或者当所述第一信 道为下行信道，所述第一符号为下行符号。
结合第五方面或第六方面或第五方面、第六方面的任一种实现方式，在第十一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一信息包括所述第一信道的重复次数，和/或，N个所述第一信道中的一个或多个第一信道所在的时域资源的信息。
在该实现方式中，网络设备指示第一信道的重复次数，在重复传输第一信道的场景下，无需在每个第一信道上发送参考信号，节约了系统开销，提升了传输效率。另外，多个第一信道所在的时域资源的信息可以是相同的，则第一信息可以包括一个第一信道所在的时域资源的信息。
第七方面，提供了一种通信方法，包括：终端设备获取一个或多个时间单元中候选的参考信号的时域资源；终端设备接收下行控制信息，所述下行控制信息包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域以至于；或第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源；所述终端设备根据所述第一指示信息传输参考信号。
在该方面中，网络设备通过下行控制信息指示进行参考信号的传输所采用的时域资源，或在一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源，网络设备能够以较小的开销，准确地指示灵活配置的参考信号的时域资源，终端设备能够准确地确定灵活配置的参考信号的时域资源的信息，从而提高了系统传输的效率。
第八方面，提供了一种通信方法，包括：网络设备发送下行控制信息，所述下行控制信息包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域以至于；或第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源；所述网络设备根据所述第一指示信息传输参考信号。
结合第一方面至第八方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述候选的参考信号的时域资源包括以下一个或多个时域资源：高层信令配置的时域资源；预先定义的时域资源；或根据在所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合确定的时域资源，所述符号配置集合为符号配置列表的子集或全集。
在该实现方式中，候选的参考信号的时域资源的设置方式有多种，相应地，终端设备获取候选的参考信号的时域资源也有多种。
结合第一方面至第八方面，在又一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一指示信息的比特数量与所述候选的参考信号的时域资源的个数相关。
在该实现方式中，设置的候选的参考信号的时域资源的个数越多，则第一指示信息的比特数量越多，第一指示信息的比特数量与候选的参考信号的时域资源的个数具有对应关系，根据第一指示信息的值，可以确定候选的参考信号的时域资源。
结合第一方面至第八方面，在又一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一指示信息的比特数量为ceiling(log2(1+Z1))个比特或ceiling(log2(2+Z1))个比特，其中，ceiling表示 向上取整，Z1为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源的时域资源个数。
在该实现方式中，第一指示信息的比特数量与候选的参考信号的时域资源的个数具有具体的对应关系，根据第一指示信息的值，可以确定候选的参考信号的时域资源。
结合第一方面至第八方面，在又一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一指示信息的比特数量与所述符号配置子集的个数相关。
在该实现方式中，第一指示信息的比特数量与符号配置子集的个数具有对应关系，根据第一指示信息的值可以确定对应的符号配置子集，从而确定参考信号的时域资源。
结合第一方面至第八方面，在又一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一指示信息的比特数量为ceiling(log2(1+Z2))个比特或ceiling(log2(2+Z2))个比特，其中，ceiling表示向上取整，Z2为符号配置子集的个数。
在该实现方式中，第一指示信息的比特数量与符号配置子集的个数具有具体的对应关系。
结合第一方面至第八方面，在又一种可能的实现方式中，当所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一参考信号的时域资源时，所述第一指示信息对应的比特状态值与所述第一参考信号的时域资源相关。
在该实现方式中，通过第一指示信息对应的比特状态值，可以确定第一参考信号的时域资源。
结合第一方面至第八方面，在又一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一指示信息对应的比特状态值与所述第一参考信号的时域资源在所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的时间顺序相关。
结合第一方面至第八方面，在又一种可能的实现方式中，当所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一参考信号的时域资源时，所述第一指示信息对应的比特状态值与所述第一参考信号的时域资源所在的符号配置子集的索引相关。
结合第一方面至第八方面，在又一种可能的实现方式中，所述下行控制信息还包括：所述第一指示信息对应的第一比特状态值，所述第一比特状态值用于指示在所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号，所述第一比特状态值是预先定义的；和/或，所述第一指示信息对应的第二比特状态值，所述第二比特状态值用于指示所述第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二比特状态值是预先定义的。
结合第一方面至第八方面，在又一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一指示信息的比特中的一个或多个比特与所述符号配置子集一一对应。
结合第一方面至第八方面，在又一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一指示信息还包括偏移值，所述偏移值包括以下的一种或多种：所述第一参考信号的时域资源所在的时隙与所述第一信道所在的时隙之间的时隙偏移值；所述第一参考信号的时域资源的起始符号与所述第一信道的起始符号之间的符号偏移值；所述第一参考信号的时域资源的起始符号与所述第一信道的终止符号之间的符号偏移值；所述第一参考信号的时域资源的终止符号与所述第一信道的终止符号之间的符号偏移值。
在该实现方式中，第一参考信号的时域资源可以是相对的时域资源，即相对于第一信 道的时域资源，该时域资源包括时隙信息和/或符号信息。
结合第一方面至第八方面，在又一种可能的实现方式中，所述候选的参考信号的时域资源包括高层信令配置的时域资源和/或预先定义的时域资源，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一指示信息包括符号信息和/或时隙信息，其中，所述符号信息为以下一种或多种：绝对符号索引，相对所述第一信道的起始符号的符号偏移索引，相对所述第一信道的终止符号的符号偏移索引；所述时隙信息为以下一种或多种：绝对时隙索引，相对所述第一信道所在时隙的时隙偏移索引。
在该实现方式中，第一参考信号的时域资源可以是相对的时域资源，即相对于第一信道的时域资源，也可以是绝对的时域资源。该时域资源包括时隙信息和/或符号信息。
结合第一方面至第八方面，在又一种可能的实现方式中，所述候选的参考信号的时域资源包括高层信令配置的参考信号的时域资源，所述高层信令配置的参考信号的时域资源包括以下一种或多种：高层信令针对时隙配置的；高层信令针对下行控制信息的格式配置的；高层信令针对无线网络临时标识RNTI配置的；高层信令针对第一信道的映射类型配置的；或高层信令针对下行控制信息的搜索空间配置的。
在该实现方式中，网络设备可以针对时隙的传输方向和/或时隙集合来配置用于传输参考信号的时域资源。可以更加灵活的配置参考信号的时域资源，例如上行和下行传输需求不同，因此参考信号的时域资源可以配置不同。不同时隙上的系统资源使用情况不同，那么参考信号的时域资源可以配置不同。
网络设备可以针对下行控制信息的格式来配置用于传输参考信号的时域资源。网络设备预先配置的DCI的格式与参考信号的对应关系，可以通过DCI的格式隐式指示不同的参考信号的时域资源，从而达到在不进一步增加DCI中比特数的情况下，增加指示参考信号的时域资源的范围，提高系统灵活性，从而提升系统效率。
网络设备可以针对RNTI配置用于传输参考信号的时域资源。网络设备预先配置的RNTI与参考信号的对应关系，可以通过RNTI隐式指示不同的参考信号的时域资源，从而达到在不进一步增加DCI中比特数的情况下，增加指示参考信号的时域资源的范围，提高系统灵活性，从而提升系统效率。
网络设备可以针对第一信道的映射类型来配置用于传输参考信号的时域资源。网络设备预先配置的映射类型与参考信号的对应关系，然后可以通过映射类型隐式指示不同的参考信号的时域资源，从而达到在不进一步增加DCI中比特数的情况下，增加指示参考信号的时域资源的范围，提高系统灵活性，从而提升系统效率。
网络设备还可以针对下行控制信息的搜索空间来配置用于传输参考信号的时域资源。
结合第一方面至第八方面，在又一种可能的实现方式中，所述候选的参考信号的时域资源为所述一个或多个时间单元中的以下一个或多个符号：所述一个或多个时间单元中最早的时间单元中的第一个符号；所述一个或多个时间单元中最后的时间单元中的最后一个符号；所述一个或多个时间单元中预先定义的一个或多个符号；所述一个或多个时间单元中高层信令配置的一个或多个符号。
第九方面，提供了一种通信装置，可以实现上述第一方面、第三方面、第五方面或第七方面中的通信方法。例如所述通信装置可以是芯片(如基带芯片，或通信芯片等)或者 终端设备。可以通过软件、硬件、或者通过硬件执行相应的软件实现上述方法。
在一种可能的实现方式中，所述通信装置的结构中包括处理器、存储器；所述处理器被配置为支持所述装置执行上述通信方法中相应的功能。存储器用于与处理器耦合，其保存所述装置必要的程序(指令)和/或数据。可选地，所述通信装置还可以包括通信接口用于支持所述装置与其他网元之间的通信。
在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述通信装置，可以包括执行上述方法中相应动作的单元或模块。
在又一种可能的实现方式中，包括处理器和收发装置，所述处理器与所述收发装置耦合，所述处理器用于执行计算机程序或指令，以控制所述收发装置进行信息的接收和发送；当所述处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令时，所述处理器还用于实现上述方法。其中，所述收发装置可以为收发器、收发电路或输入输出接口。当所述通信装置为芯片时，所述收发装置为收发电路或输入输出接口。
在又一种可能的实现方式中，所述通信装置的结构中包括处理器；所述处理器被配置为支持所述装置执行上述通信方法中相应的功能。
当所述通信装置为芯片时，收发单元可以是输入输出单元，比如输入输出电路或者通信接口。当所述通信装置为终端设备时，收发单元可以是发射器和接收器，或发射机和接收机。
第十方面，提供了一种通信装置，可以实现上述第二方面、第四方面、第六方面或第八方面中的通信方法。例如所述通信装置可以是芯片(如基带芯片，或通信芯片等)或者网络设备，可以通过软件、硬件、或者通过硬件执行相应的软件实现上述方法。
在一种可能的实现方式中，所述通信装置的结构中包括处理器、存储器；所述处理器被配置为支持所述装置执行上述通信方法中相应的功能。存储器用于与处理器耦合，其保存所述装置必要的程序(指令)和数据。可选地，所述通信装置还可以包括通信接口用于支持所述装置与其他网元之间的通信。
在另一种可能的实现方式中，所述通信装置，可以包括执行上述方法中的相应动作的单元模块。
在又一种可能的实现方式中，包括处理器和收发装置，所述处理器与所述收发装置耦合，所述处理器用于执行计算机程序或指令，以控制所述收发装置进行信息的接收和发送；当所述处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令时，所述处理器还用于实现上述方法。其中，所述收发装置可以为收发器、收发电路或输入输出接口。当所述通信装置为芯片时，所述收发装置为收发电路或输入输出接口。
在又一种可能的实现方式中，所述通信装置的结构中包括处理器；所述处理器被配置为支持所述装置执行上述通信方法中相应的功能。
当所述通信装置为芯片时，收发单元可以是输入输出单元，比如输入输出电路或者通信接口。当所述通信装置为网络设备时，收发单元可以是发射器和接收器，或发射机和接收机。
第十一方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令，当所述计算机程序或指令被执行时，实现上述各方面所述的方法。
第十二方面，提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，当该指令在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述各方面所述的方法。
第十三方面，提供了一种通信系统，包括第九方面和第十方面中的通信装置。
附图说明
图1为本申请涉及的一种通信系统的示意图；
图2a为示例的一种PUSCH映射类型A的DMRS的位置示意图；
图2b为示例的一种PUSCH映射类型B的DMRS的位置示意图；
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的交互流程示意图；
图4a为PDSCH传输示意图；
图4b为PUSCH传输示意图；
图5为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的交互流程示意图；
图6为示例的符号配置集合的示意图；
图7为示例的符号配置子集的划分示意图；
图8为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法的交互流程示意图；
图9为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法的交互流程示意图；
图10为示例的一个第二参考信号的时域资源示意图；
图11为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图；
图12为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置的结构示意图；
图13为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信装置的结构示意图；
图14为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信装置的结构示意图；
图15为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信装置的结构示意图；
图16为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信装置的结构示意图；
图17为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信装置的结构示意图；
图18为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信装置的结构示意图；
图19为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信装置的结构示意图；
图20为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信装置的结构示意图。
具体实施方式
下面结合本申请实施例中的附图对本申请实施例进行描述。
图1给出了本申请涉及的一种通信系统的示意图。该通信系统可以包括一个或多个网络设备100(仅示出1个)以及与网络设备100连接的一个或多个终端设备200。
网络设备100可以是能和终端设备200通信的设备。网络设备100可以是任意一种具有无线收发功能的设备。包括但不限于：基站(NodeB)、演进型基站(evolved NodeB，eNodeB)、第五代(the fifth generation，5G)通信系统中的基站(例如gNB)、未来通信系统中的基站或网络设备、WiFi系统中的接入节点、无线中继节点、无线回传节点等。网络设备100还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network，CRAN)场景下的无线控制器。网络设备100还可以是小站，传输节点(transmission reference point，TRP)等。本申请的 实施例对网络设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。
终端设备200是一种具有无线收发功能的设备，可以部署在陆地上，包括室内或室外、手持、穿戴或车载；也可以部署在水面上，如轮船上等；还可以部署在空中，如飞机、气球和卫星上等。所述终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等等。本申请的实施例对应用场景不做限定。终端设备有时也可以称为用户设备(user equipment，UE)、接入终端设备、UE单元、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端设备、移动设备、终端(terminal)、无线通信设备、UE代理或UE装置等。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”可被互换使用。“多个”是指两个或两个以上，鉴于此，本申请实施例中也可以将“多个”理解为“至少两个”。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。另外，字符“/”，如无特殊说明，一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。本申请实施例中出现的“第一”、“第二”等描述，仅作示意与区分描述对象之用，没有次序之分，也不表示本申请实施例中对设备个数的特别限定，不能构成对本申请实施例的任何限制。
本申请实施例中涉及的高层信令，可以指网络设备发出的高层协议层的信令。高层协议层为物理层以上的协议层。其中，高层协议层具体可以为以下协议层中的一个或多个：媒体接入控制(medium access control，MAC)层、无线链路控制(radio link control，RLC)层、分组数据会聚协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)层、无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)层和非接入层(non access stratum，NAS)。
本申请实施例涉及的参考信号包括上行参考信号以及下行参考信号。具体地，上行参考信号可以是解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal，DMRS)，或相位跟踪参考信号(phase-tracking reference signal，PT-RS)，或探测参考信号(sounding reference signal，SRS)，或是其他参考信号，本申请在此不做特别限定。其中，DMRS又可以分为用于PUSCH解调的参考信号(PUSCH DMRS)和用于PUCCH解调的参考信号(PUCCH DMRS)。下行参考信号可以是DMRS，或PT-RS，或信道状态信息参考信号(channel-state information reference signal，CSI-RS)，或同步序列，或物理广播信道块(synchronization sequence/shysical broadcast channel block,SSB)，或是其他参考信号。其中，DMRS又可以分为用于PDSCH解调的参考信号(PDSCH DMRS)、用于PDCCH解调的参考信号(PDCCH DMRS)、用于物理广播信道(Physical broadcast channel，PBCH)解调的参考信号(PBCH DMRS)。
在本申请实施例中，上行参考信号的时域资源的确定方法可以有以下列举的实现方式。可以理解，以下实现方式仅为举例，本申请实施例对上行参考信号的时域资源的确定方法不做任何限定。
以PUSCH DMRS为例，PUSCH DMRS的时域资源与以下参数有关：PUSCH映射类 型(PUSCH mapping type)、上行DMRS额外位置指示信息(UL-DMRS-add-pos)、在一个slot内PUSCH占用的时域符号数、每个DMRS时域资源索引对应DMRS占用的符号数为1个或2个符号、PUSCH是否进行跳频(frequency hopping)。其中：
1)PUSCH映射类型，包括PUSCH映射类型A和PUSCH映射类型B。
a.PUSCH映射类型A与参考信号的时域资源的关系：如表1和表2所示，当PUSCH不进行跳频传输的时候，l 0为符号2或符号3，此时表1和表2中时域资源索引为符号的绝对索引，即时域资源索引通知的为相对于该PDSCH所在的时隙上的绝对符号位置，其中所述符号2或符号3是根据高层信令确定的。如表3所示，当PUSCH进行跳频传输的时候，l 0为PUSCH的每跳频部分上的第1个符号，此时表3中时域资源索引为符号的相对索引，即时域资源索引通知的为相对于该每跳频部分的第1个符号的符号位置。
b.PUSCH映射类型B与参考信号的时域资源的关系：如表1和表2所示，当PUSCH进行不跳频传输的时候，l 0为PUSCH所在的时域资源中的第1个符号，此时表1到表2中时域资源索引为符号的相对索引，即时域资源索引通知的为相对于该PUSCH的第1个符号的符号位置。如表3所示，当PUSCH进行跳频传输的时候，l 0为PUSCH的每部分上的第1个符号。此时表3中时域资源索引为符号的相对索引，即时域资源索引通知的为相对于该每跳频部分的第1个符号的符号位置。
2)上行DMRS额外位置指示信息可以取值0，1，2或者3，是由高层信令通知的。
3)每个DMRS时域资源索引对应DMRS占用的符号数可以为1个或2个符号。根据表1到表3中的DMRS时域资源索引以及DMRS占用的符号数可以确定为DMRS的时域资源。例如通过表1到表3确定的一个上行DMRS时域资源索引为l 0。如表1和表3所示，当每个DMRS时域资源索引对应DMRS占用的符号数为1个符号时，那么上行DMRS的时域资源索引对应为l 0+l′，l′＝0；如表2所示，当每个DMRS时域资源索引对应DMRS占用的符号数为2个符号时，那么上行DMRS的时域资源索引对应为l 0+l′，l′＝0和1。
4)PUSCH是否进行跳频。其中，PUSCH跳频的含义为：根据预先定义的方式，PUSCH在时域上分成两个部分时域长度，每跳频部分的PUSCH在不同的频域资源上传输。例如PUSCH的时域长度为8个符号，当PUSCH进行跳频时，这个8符号的PUSCH会被分成长度为4符号的两跳频部分PUSCH，每跳频部分PUSCH可以称为per hop PUSCH，这两个4符号长度的PUSCH分别在不同的频域资源上传输。频域资源可以是一个或多个资源块(resource block，RB)，也可以是一个或多个资源单元(resource element，RE)，也可以是一个或多个载波/小区，也可以是一个或多个部分带宽(bandwidth part，BWP)，也可以是一个或多个载波上的一个或多个BWP上的一个或多个RB，也可以是一个或多个载波上的一个或多个BWP上的一个或多个RB上的一个或多个RE。
以下为确定DMRS时域资源的表格的举例说明：
表1:DMRS时域资源索引，当每个DMRS时域资源索引对应1个符号且不跳频
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000001
进一步的，对应表1的PUSCH映射类型A，DMRS时域资源索引如图2a所示。对应表1的PUSCH映射类型B，DMRS时域资源索引如图2b所示。由图2a可知，l 0为符号2或符号3，此时时域资源索引0～13为符号的绝对索引。由图2b可知，l 0为PUSCH所在的时域资源中的第1个符号，此时时域资源索引F0～F13为符号的相对索引。进一步地，在图2a中，当PUSCH占用的时域符号数(duration)为8-9时，包括l 0和7两个DMRS时域资源索引；当时域资源长度为10-11时，包括l 0、6、9三个DMRS时域资源索引；以此类推。在图2b中，当时域资源长度为5-7时，包括F0和F4两个DMRS时域资源索引；当时域资源长度为8-9时，包括F0、F3、F6三个DMRS时域资源索引；以此类推。
表2:DMRS时域资源索引，当每个DMRS时域资源索引对应DMRS占用的符号数为2个符号且PUSCH不进行跳频
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000002
表3:DMRS时域资源索引，当每个DMRS时域资源索引对应DMRS占用的符号数为1个符号且PUSCH进行跳频
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000003
在本申请实施例中，下行参考信号的时域资源的确定方法可以有以下列举的实现方式。可以理解，以下实现方式仅为举例，本申请实施例对下行参考信号的时域资源的确定方法不做任何限定。
以PDSCH DMRS为例，PDSCH DMRS的时域资源与以下参数有关：PDSCH映射类型(PDSCH mapping type)、下行DMRS额外位置指示信息(DL-DMRS-add-pos)、在一个slot内PDSCH占用的时域符号数、每个DMRS时域资源索引对应DMRS占用的符号数为1个或2个符号。需要注意的是，下行没有跳频。其中：
1)PDSCH映射类型，包括PDSCH映射类型A和PDSCH映射类型B。
a.PDSCH映射类型A与参考信号的时域资源的关系：l 0为符号2或符号3，所述符号2或符号3是根据高层信令确定的。此时表4和表5中时域资源索引为符号的绝对索引，即时域资源索引通知的为相对于该PDSCH所在的时隙上的绝对符号位置。
b.PDSCH映射类型B与参考信号的时域资源的关系：l 0为PDSCH所在的时域资源的第1个符号。此时表4和表5中时域资源索引为符号的相对索引，即时域资源索引通知的为相对于该PDSCH所在的时域资源的第1个符号的符号位置。
2)下行DMRS额外位置指示信息可以取值0，1，2或者3，是由高层信令通知的。
3)每个下行DMRS时域资源索引对应DMRS占用的符号数可以为1个或2个符号。根据下表4和表5中可以确定存在的几个DMRS时域资源。例如，表4中，确定的一个下行DMRS时域资源索引为l 0，当每个下行DMRS时域资源索引对应DMRS占用的符号数可以为1个符号时，那么下行DMRS的时域资索引即为l 0+l′，l′＝0；例如，表5中，当每个下行DMRS时域资源索引对应DMRS占用的符号数可以为2个符号时，那么下行DMRS的时域资源索引即为l 0+l′，l′＝0和1。
以下就是各种情况下的确定DMRS时域资源的表格：
表4:PDSCH DMRS时域资源符号索引，当每个DMRS的时域资源索引对应DMRS占用的符号数为1个符号
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000004
表5:PDSCH DMRS时域资源索引，当每个DMRS时域资源索引对应DMRS占用的符号数为2个符号
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000005
本申请提供了一种通信方法及装置，网络设备能够以较小的开销，准确地指示灵活配置的参考信号的时域资源，终端设备能够准确地确定灵活配置的参考信号的时域资源的信息，从而提高了系统传输的效率。
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的交互流程示意图，该方法包括：
S101、终端设备获取一个或多个时间单元中候选的参考信号的时域资源。
如前所述，在上行传输或下行传输中，设备在一个或多个时间单元中传输信道时，需要在该一个或多个时间单元中传输参考信号，该参考信号可用于进行信道估计。本实施例中，在下行传输中，网络设备发送参考信号，终端设备接收参考信号，终端设备使用参考信号进行信道估计；在上行传输中，终端设备发送参考信号，网络设备接收参考信号，网络设备使用参考信号进行信道估计。
在下行传输中，终端设备需要接收参考信号，网络设备需要发送参考信号，在S101中，终端设备和/或网络设备获取一个或多个时间单元中候选的参考信号的时域资源。相应的，在上行传输中，网络设备需要接收参考信号，终端设备需要发送参考信号，则网络设备和/或终端设备获取一个或多个时间单元中候选的参考信号的时域资源。
本申请中的时域资源可以是一个或多个时隙，也可以是一个或多个时隙上的一个或多个符号。符号可以是正交频分复用符号(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing，OFDM)。其中OFDM符号可以使用转换预编码(transform precoding)，也可以不使用transform precoding。如果使用transform precoding，又可以被称为单载波频分复用(single carrier–frequency division multiplexing，SC-FDM)。
本申请中的一个时间单元的长度可以包括一个或多个时域资源。该一个或多个时间单 元可以是高层信令配置的，也可以是预先定义的，也可以是根据下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)确定的。
S102、网络设备发送下行控制信息。
相应的，终端设备接收下行控制信息。
其中，下行控制信息包括第一指示信息和第一信道的传输信息。
其中，第一信道用于承载数据和/或控制信息。第一信道可以是PUSCH，PDSCH，PUCCH和PDCCH中的一种或多种。可以理解，“第一信道”的描述不代表终端设备和网络设备之间仅建立一个或一种信道，本申请实施例对第一信道的类型和数量不做任何限定。第一信道的传输信息包括：调制编码方式、时频资源等信息。网络设备发送此传输信息以使得终端设备根据该传输信息接收第一信道。
具体地，对于下行传输来说，该第一信道包括PDSCH或PDCCH。以PDSCH为例，如图4a所示的PDSCH传输示意图，网络设备发送DCI，该DCI中包括PDSCH的传输信息。此PDSCH的传输信息包括PDSCH的时频资源、调制编码方式等指示信息。终端设备接收到该DCI，就可以确定PDSCH的传输资源和传输方式。
对于上行传输来说，该第一信道包括PUSCH或PUCCH。以PUSCH为例，如图4b所示的PUSCH传输示意图，网络设备发送DCI，该DCI包括PUSCH的传输信息。此PUSCH的传输信息包括PUSCH的时频资源、调制编码方式等指示信息。终端设备接收到DCI，就可以确定PDSCH的传输资源和传输方式。
其中，第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：
第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域资源；
第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或
所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源。
为了方便描述，在本申请实施例中，将S101中获取的候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域资源称为第一参考信号的时域资源；将上述表1～表5中的参考信号的时域资源的索引对应的时域资源称为第二参考信号的时域资源，以下不再重复描述。
可以理解的是，第一参考信号和第二参考信号的确定方式不同。具体的，第一参考信号的时域资源可以通过预先定义，或者第一高层信令，或者DCI确定。第二参考信号的时域资源是通过表1至表5和第二高层信令确定的。可以理解的是，这里第一高层信令和第二高层信令是对应不相同的高层信令，或者是对应同一个高层信令中的不同字段。进一步的，第一参考信号的时域资源和第二参考信号的时域资源可以相同，也可以不同，本申请不做限定。
可选地，第一参考信号的时域资源也可以是第二参考信号的时域资源中的一个时域资源。进一步的，对于第二参考信号的时域资源，通过表1至表5确定的第二参考信号的时域资源为多个时域资源索引时，如l 0,7，那么在上行传输中终端设备发送多个时域资源索引，网络设备接收多个时域资源索引。相同的，在下行链路中终端设备接收多个时域资源索引，网络设备发送多个时域资源索引。
对于第一参考信号的时域资源，通过本申请中的方法确定第一参考信号的时域资源为多个时域资源索引时，那么在上行传输中终端设备无需发送多个时域资源索引，而是可以根据DCI或其他信息确定发送的参考信号的时域资源索引。其中，上述表1～表5中的第二参考信号的时域资源的索引是预先定义的，而候选的参考信号的时域资源则可以是终端设备通过本申请中的方式在传输参考信号前获取的。
本实施例中，用于传输参考信号的时域资源可以是第一参考信号的时域资源，也可以是第二参考信号的时域资源。此外，在上述一个或多个时间单元上也可以没有参考信号的时域资源。
在本申请实施例中，所述候选的参考信号的时域资源可以是高层信令配置的，则终端设备接收网络设备发送的高层信令，该高层信令中包括候选的参考信号的时域资源。
具体地，网络设备通过高层信令向终端设备发送时域资源的配置信令，该配置信令中包括配置的一个或多个时间单元中候选的参考信号的时域资源。终端设备接收该配置信令，获取候选的参考信号的时域资源。
可选地，所述候选的参考信号的时域资源也可以是预先定义的，则终端设备从自身的存储区域获取预先定义的候选的参考信号的时域资源。同样，网络设备从自身的存储区域获取预先定义的候选的参考信号的时域资源。
所述候选的参考信号的时域资源可以是所述一个或多个时间单元中高层信令配置或预先定义的一个或多个符号。具体地，所述候选的参考信号的时域资源可以理解为是所述一个或多个时间单元中每个时间单元中的一个或多个符号，或者，所述一个或多个时间单元中所有符号中的一个或多个符号。其中，所述高层信令可以是用于确定候选的参考信号的时域资源所在的每个时间单元中的第几个符号，或所述一个或多个时间单元中所有符号中的第几个符号，也可以是用于确定候选的参考信号的时域资源所在的所述一个或多个时间单元中符号索引和/或时隙索引，也可以是用于确定所述一个或多个时间单元中候选的参考信号的时域资源出现的周期和/或符号索引。
可选的，所述候选的参考信号的时域资源为所述一个或多个时间单元中的以下一个或多个符号：所述一个或多个时间单元中时序上最早一个的时间单元中的第一个符号；所述一个或多个时间单元中时序上最后一个的时间单元中的最后一个符号；所述一个或多个时间单元中预先定义的一个或多个符号；所述一个或多个时间单元中时序上最早一个的时间单元中的最后一个符号；所述一个或多个时间单元中时序上最后一个的时间单元中的第一个符号；所述一个或多个时间单元中每个时间单元中的第一个符号；所述一个或多个时间单元中每个时间单元中的最后一个符号。可以理解，所述候选的参考信号的时域资源可以是一个符号，例如一个时间单元中的第一个或者最后一个符号；也可以包含多个符号，例如包含多个时间单元中的每个时间单元中的第一个符号；或者包含一个时间单元中的第一个符号以及另一个时间单元中的最后一个符号，本申请对此不做特别限定。
可选地，所述候选的参考信号的时域资源也可以是终端设备根据在所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合确定的时域资源，所述符号配置集合为符号配置列表的子集或全集。
其中，所述符号配置列表可以是由网络设备发送给终端设备的或预先定义的符号配置 列表，包括上行符号配置列表和/或下行符号配置列表。符号配置可以是上行符号配置或下行符号配置。所述符号配置集合是由符号配置列表确定的。
所述符号配置列表是指上行或下行信道占用的时域资源配置，以使得终端设备通过高层信令或下行控制信息确定用于传输的下行信道占用的时域资源。具体的，所述符号配置列表中的每一个符号配置包括起始符号的索引信息、持续符号数信息以及时隙偏移值信息，还可以包括其他信息本申请不做限定。对于上行符号配置列表中，所述时隙偏移值信息用于指示下行控制信道所在的时隙和与所述下行控制信道对应的上行信道所在的时隙之间距离的时隙个数。对于下行符号配置列表中，所述时隙偏移值信息用于指示下行控制信道所在的时隙和与所述下行控制信道对应的下行信道所在的时隙之间距离的时隙个数。
以上行符号配置列表为例，如下表6所示：
表6
符号配置索引 时隙偏移值 起始上行符号索引S 符号持续符号数L
0 0 0 13
1 0 0 2
2 1 0 4
3 2 0 7
4 3 4 4
5 4 7 7
6 0 9 2
7 0 11 2
本申请并不限定符号配置列表的实现方法，也不限定符号配置列表中包含的信息数量。在具体实现时，起始符号的索引信息和持续符号数信息也可以通过起始和长度指示(start and length indicators value，SLIV)信息确定，例如表7所示。
表7
符号配置索引 时隙偏移值 起始和长度指示SLIV
0 0 29
1 0 14
2 1 42
3 2 84
4 3 46
5 4 91
6 0 23
7 0 25
可选地，SLIV域的比特大小为7比特。
可选地，SLIV和起始下行符号索引S和下行符号持续符号数L的具体对应关系为：
若(L-1)<＝7，那么SLIV＝14*(L-1)+S；
否则，SLIV＝14*(14-L+1)+14-1-S。这里0<L<14-S。
可以理解，表6和表7是一一对应的，区别在于：表6显式地通知S和L，表7是通过一个SLIV来指示S和L。
在本申请实施例中，一个符号配置对应符号配置列表中的一行。符号配置集合是指一个或多个符号配置的集合。具体的符号配置集合的确定方式可以如下所示。
可选地，对一个或多个时间单元中的每个时间单元对应的有效的符号配置集合取并集，得到所述一个或多个时间单元对应的符号配置集合。
可选地，对符号配置列表中的每一个符号配置，同时通过比较该符号配置在所述一个或多个时间单元对应的多个时间单元中的有效性确定该下行符号配置是否有效，从而进一步确定由有效的符号配置组成的所述一个或多个时间单元对应的符号配置集合。
具体的，若符号配置为上行符号配置，那么该在所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合不包括所述符号配置列表满足以下条件的第一符号配置：所述第一符号配置对应的上行符号与所述一个或多个时间单元中的每个时间单元的下行符号均部分重叠或全部重叠，或者，所述第一符号配置对应的上行符号与所述一个或多个时间单元中的任意一个时间单元的下行符号均部分重叠或全部重叠。其中，第一符号配置可以理解为无效的上行符号配置，也可以有其他符号配置为无效的配置，本申请不另做限定。可以理解的是，符号配置集合中包括的为有效的上行符号配置的集合。需要说明的是，该符号配置集合为不包括第一符号配置的符号配置集合的子集或全集。
具体的，若符号配置为下行符号配置，那么该在所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合不包括所述符号配置列表满足以下条件的第二符号配置：所述第二符号配置对应的下行符号与所述一个或多个时间单元中的每个时间单元的上行符号均部分重叠或全部重叠，或者，所述第二符号配置对应的上行符号与所述一个或多个时间单元中的任意一个时间单元的上行符号均部分重叠或全部重叠。其中，第二符号配置可以理解为无效的下行符号配置，也可以有其他符号配置为无效的配置，本申请不另做限定。可以理解的是，符号配置集合中包括的为有效的下行符号配置的集合。需要说明的是，该符号配置集合为不包括第一符号配置的符号配置集合的子集或全集。
具体地，对于上行传输，若上行信道所对应的上行符号配置的符号中存在下行符号，则这个上行信道就无法发送，所以这个上行符号配置就是无效的。对于下行传输，对于下行信道所对应的下行符号配置的符号中存在上行符号，则这个下行信道就无法发送，所以这个下行符号配置就是无效的。
在本申请的一个实施方式中，第一指示信息指示的是第一参考信号的时域资源，则终端设备根据第一指示信息确定参考信号的时域资源为第一参考信号的时域资源。
可选地，第一参考信号的时域资源为步骤S101中终端设备获取的候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域资源。例如，该候选的参考信号的时域资源包括时域资源索引C1，时域资源索引C2，时域资源索引C3和时域资源索引C4，那么第一参考信号的时域资源为上述4个时域资源索引中的一个或多个时域资源索引。
相对于第二参考信号的时域资源一定是在第一信道的时域资源上传输参考信号，第一参考信号的时域资源更为灵活。具体的，第一参考信号的时域资源可以是一个或多个时隙中的一个符号或多个符号，而第一参考信号的时域资源无需在第一信道的时域资源上传输参考信号，第一参考信号的时域资源也无需和第一信道的时域资源的符号数相关。
在本申请的另一个实施方式中，第一指示信息指示的是第二参考信号的时域资源，则终端设备根据第一指示信息确定参考信号的时域资源为第二参考信号的时域资源。所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号。其中，第一信道所在的时域资源可以是表1～表5中的时域资源。具体地，当第一指示信息指示的是第二参考信号的时域资源，那么终端设备根据PDSCH或PUSCH对应的持续符号数、DMRS额外位置指示信息、映射类型等信息和表1～表5中的预先定义的参考信号的时域资源，确定所述第二参考信号的时域资源。
在本申请的又一个实施方式中，第一指示信息指示的是所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源。若第一信道是上行信道，终端设备将不会在所述一个或多个时间单元上发送参考信号。若第一信道是下行信道，终端设备将不会在所述一个或多个时间单元上接收参考信号。所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源可以是第一指示信息的中的缺省值或保留值指示的。可选地，所述第一信道所在的时域资源没有参考信号的时域资源。
可选地，在该实施方式中，所述方法还包括以下步骤：接收第二配置信息，所述第二配置信息用于配置网络设备支持所述第一信道的时域资源上不存在参考信号。在当终端设备接收到第二配置信息后，则终端设备接收到的第一指示信息可以指示所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源。
本实施例中，传输可以理解为发送或接收。
可选地，在下行传输中，所述方法还包括：S103、网络设备根据所述下行控制信息，发送第一信道。相应的，终端设备根据所述下行控制信息，接收第一信道。
具体的，网络设备还在第一信道所在的时域资源上发送第一信道。相应的，终端设备还在第一信道所在的时频资源上接收第一信道。
可选地，当第一指示信息指示的是所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源时，终端设备无需根据所述下行控制信息在所述一个或多个时间单元上接收参考信号，而终端设备可以根据其他的下行控制信息或高层信令或预先定义来发送参考信号。同样的，网络设备无需根据所述下行控制信息在所述一个或多个时间单元上发送参考信号，而网络设备可以根据其他的下行控制信息或高层信令或预先定义来接收参考信号。
可选地，S103还包括：网络设备根据所述下行控制信息发送参考信号。相应的，终端设备根据所述下行控制信息接收参考信号。
其中，所述第一指示信息指示的是第一参考信号的时域资源或第二参考信号的时域资源，网络设备根据所述第一指示信息发送参考信号。相应的，所述第一指示信息指示的是第一参考信号的时域资源或第二参考信号的时域资源，终端设备根据所述第一指示信息，接收参考信号。
在上行传输中，作为S103的替换的步骤，所述方法还包括：终端设备根据所述下行控 制信息，发送第一信道。相应的，网络设备接收第一信道。可选地，S103的替换的步骤还包括：终端设备根据所述下行控制信息，发送参考信号。相应的，网络设备接收参考信号。具体的实现可参考下行传输，在此不再赘述。
可选地，在S101之前，还可以包括步骤：网络设备发送第一配置信息。相应的，终端设备接收第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息用于配置终端设备支持参考信号在所述候选的参考信号的时域资源上传输，或者，用于配置终端设备支持在下行控制信息中接收第一指示信息。
可选地，在步骤S101中，若所述候选的参考信号的时域资源是高层信令配置的，可以采用如下任意一种实现方式：
可能的实现方法一：高层信令是针对时隙配置的。
具体而言，网络设备针对时隙的传输方向和/或时隙集合配置所述候选的参考信号的时域资源。例如，网络设备针对时隙的传输方向配置所述候选的参考信号的时域资源包括：发送第一高层信令，所述第一高层信令用于配置上行时隙上的候选的参考信号的时域资源，和/或，发送第二高层信令，所述第二高层信令用于配置下行时隙上的候选的参考信号的时域资源。又例如，网络设备针对时隙集合配置所述候选的参考信号的时域资源包括：发送第一高层信令，所述第一高层信令用于配置第一时隙集合和/或第二时隙集合上的候选的参考信号的时域资源，即不同的时隙集合可以配置不同的参考信号的时域资源。一个时隙集合中包括一个或多个时隙。此多个时隙可以是连续的，也可以是不连续的，本实施例不做限定。应用此方法可以更加灵活的配置参考信号的时域资源，例如上行和下行传输需求不同，因此参考信号的时域资源可以配置不同。不同时隙上的系统资源使用情况不同，那么参考信号的时域资源可以配置不同。
可能的实现方法二：高层信令是针对下行控制信息的格式配置的。
具体而言，网络设备针对下行控制信息的格式配置所述候选的参考信号的时域资源。下行控制信息的格式包括DCI format 0_1,DCI format 0_0,DCI format 1_0,DCI format 1_1，也可以是其他格式本申请不做限定。例如，发送第一高层信令，该第一高层信令用于配置第一DCI的格式对应的候选的参考信号的时域资源，发送第二高层信令，该第二高层信令用于配置第二DCI的格式对应的候选的参考信号的时域资源。可以理解的是，终端设备接收到DCI的格式为第一DCI的格式时，那么终端设备可以确定候选的参考信号的时域资源为第一DCI的格式对应的候选的参考信号的时域资源。反之，终端设备接收到DCI的格式为第二DCI的格式时，那么终端设备可以确定候选的参考信号的时域资源为第二DCI的格式对应的候选的参考信号的时域资源。即不同的下行控制信息可以配置不同的候选的参考信号的时域资源。这里的第一DCI的格式和第二DCI的格式可以是上述几种DCI格式之一。应用此方法，网络设备预先配置的DCI的格式与候选的参考信号的时域资源的对应关系，可以通过DCI的格式隐式指示不同的候选的参考信号的时域资源，从而达到在不进一步增加DCI中比特数的情况下，增加指示参考信号的时域资源的范围，提高系统灵活性，从而提升系统效率。尤其针对高可靠低时延通信(ultra reliable and low latency communications，URLLC)业务，可能引入新的DCI的格式，那么网络设备可以针对此格式的DCI配置适用于URLLC业务的参考信号的时域资源，从而提高URLLC信息的传输效率。
可能的实现方法三：高层信令针对无线网络临时标识(radio network temporary identity，RNTI)配置的。
具体而言，网络设备针对RNTI配置候选的参考信号的时域资源。下行控制信息在传输之前都要经过RNTI的加扰处理，不同的RNTI加扰的DCI可以认为是不同的内容和/或目的。例如，发送第一高层信令，该第一高层信令用于配置第一RNTI对应的候选的参考信号的时域资源，发送第二高层信令，该第二高层信令用于配置第二RNTI对应的候选的参考信号的时域资源。可以理解的是，终端设备接收到第一RNTI加扰的DCI时，那么终端设备确定候选的参考信号的时域资源为第一RNTI对应的候选的参考信号的时域资源。反之，终端设备接收到第二RNTI加扰的DCI时，那么终端设备确定候选的参考信号的时域资源为第二RNTI对应的候选的参考信号的时域资源。即不同的下行控制信息可以配置不同的参考信号的时域资源。应用此方法，网络设备预先配置的RNTI与候选的参考信号的时域资源的对应关系，可以通过RNTI隐式指示不同的候选的参考信号的时域资源，从而达到在不进一步增加DCI中比特数的情况下，增加指示候选的参考信号的时域资源的范围，提高系统灵活性，从而提升系统效率。可选地，所述第一RNTI加扰的DCI中的调制编码方式MCS信息对应第一MCS表格，所述第一MCS表格包括频谱效率为0.0586的一项MCS信息。所述第二RNTI为除所述第一RNTI以外的一种RNTI，例如小区无线网络临时标识(cell radio network temporary identity，C-RNTI)。其中，所述第一MCS表格可以为如下所示的表8或表9。可以看出表8或表9中的频谱效率0.0586对应的MCS索引为0。以上仅为示例，在其他示例中，包含频谱效率为0.0586的MCS信息也可以是其他表示形式，本申请实施例对此并不限定。根据高层信令，在表格9中的q的取值可以为1或2。在一些示例中，上述第一RNTI可以称为调制编码方式小区无线网络临时标识(Modulation coding scheme C-RNTI,MCS-C-RNTI)。上述MCS-C-RNTI可以指示更低的频谱效率，即可能被应用于URLLC业务中。当第一RNTI可以识别业务类型，可以针对URLLC业务配置更为适用的参考信号的时域资源，从而提高URLLC信息的传输效率。
表8
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000007
表9
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000009
可能的实现方法四：高层信令针对第一信道的映射类型配置的。
具体而言，网络设备针对第一信道的映射类型配置候选的参考信号的时域资源。其中，第一信道包括：PDSCH和/或PUSCH。第一信道的映射类型包括如前所述的映射类型A和映射类型B，也可以是其他映射类型，本申请不做限定。例如，发送第一高层信令，该第一高层信令用于配置第一映射类型对应的候选的参考信号的时域资源，发送第二高层信令，该第二高层信令用于配置第二映射类型对应的候选的参考信号的时域资源。可以理解的是，终端设备接收到第一信道的映射类型为第一映射类型时，那么终端设备可以确定第一信道对应的候选的参考信号的时域资源为第一映射类型对应的候选的参考信号的时域资源。反之，终端设备接收到第一信道的映射类型为第二映射类型时，那么终端设备可以确定第一信道对应候选的参考信号的时域资源为第二映射类型对应的候选的参考信号的时域资源。目前不同映射类型对应的参考信号的时域资源为预先定义的，应用此方法，网络设备预先配置的映射类型与候选的参考信号的时域资源的对应关系，然后可以通过映射类型隐式指示不同的候选的参考信号的时域资源，从而达到在不进一步增加DCI中比特数的情况下，增加指示参考信号的时域资源的范围，提高系统灵活性，从而提升系统效率。尤其针对URLLC业务，可能引入新的DCI的格式，那么网络设备可以针对此格式的DCI配置适用于URLLC业务的参考信号的时域资源，从而提高URLLC信息的传输效率。
可能的实现方法五：高层信令针对下行控制信息的搜索空间配置的。
具体而言，网络设备针对下行控制信息的搜索空间配置候选的参考信号的时域资源。下行控制信息的搜索空间包括公共搜索空间和用户搜索空间。例如，发送第一高层信令， 该第一高层信令用于配置第一搜索空间对应的候选的参考信号的时域资源，发送第二高层信令，该第二高层信令用于配置第二搜索空间对应的候选的参考信号的时域资源。第一搜索空间和第二搜索空间可以是上述的公共搜索空间或用户搜索空间。可以理解的是，终端设备接收到DCI所在的搜索空间为第一搜索空间时，那么终端设备可以确定第一信道对应候选的参考信号的时域资源为第一搜索空间对应的候选的参考信号的时域资源。反之，终端设备接收到DCI所在的搜索空间为第二搜索空间时，那么终端设备可以确定第一信道对应候选的参考信号的时域资源为第二搜索空间对应的候选的参考信号的时域资源。具体地，公共搜索空间检测出的DCI为公共DCI，那么可以稀疏配置参考信号；用户搜索空间检测出的DCI为特殊业务的，那么可以密集配置参考信号。
根据本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法，网络设备通过第一配置信息使能终端设备采用本申请的方案选择参考信号的时域资源传输参考信号；当终端设备未接收到该第一配置信息，或者终端设备接收到网络设备的第二配置信息，第二配置信息用于配置终端设备不能在所述候选的参考信号的时域资源上传输参考信号时，则终端设备可以采用表1～表5中参考信号的时域资源传输参考信号。另一种通信方法，网络设备通过第一配置信息使能终端设备支持在下行参考信号中接收第一指示信息，当终端设备未接收到该第一配置信息，或者终端设备接收到网络设备的第二配置信息，第二配置信息用于配置终端设备不能在下行参考信号中接收第一指示信息时，则终端设备可以采用表1～表5中参考信号的时域资源接收参考信号。其中，终端设备传输参考信号在上行传输中可以理解为终端设备发送参考信号，在下行传输中可以理解为终端设备接收参考信号。其中，第一配置信息和第二配置信息为高层信令。因此，网络设备能够以较小的开销，准确地指示灵活配置的参考信号的时域资源，终端设备能够准确地确定灵活配置的参考信号的时域资源的信息，从而提高了系统传输的效率。
如图5所示，本申请实施例提供了另一种通信方法的流程示意图，该方法可包括以下步骤：
S201、终端设备获取一个或多个时间单元的信息。
其中，一个时间单元的长度可以包括一个或多个时域资源。该一个或多个时间单元可以是高层信令配置的，也可以是预先定义的，也可以是根据DCI确定的。
可选地，终端设备接收高层信令或DCI，该高层信令或DCI用于确定所述一个或多个时间单元的信息。本申请实施例中，该高层信令或DCI可以显式指示所述一个或多个时间单元的信息，或者隐式指示所述一个或多个时间单元的信息，本实施例对此不做限定。对于显式指示的方式而言，该高层信令或DCI中可以包括专用的信息域或比特域，用于指示所述一个或多个时间单元的信息。对于隐式指示的方式而言，该高层信令或DCI中没有专用的信息域或比特域用于指示所述一个或多个时间单元的信息，而是可以通过其他的信息域或比特域上的信息获取出所述一个或多个时间单元的信息。
可选地，该一个或多个时间单元可以是预先定义的，则终端设备获取自身存储的该预先定义的一个或多个时间单元的信息。
可选地，该一个或多个时间单元可以包括以下一种或多种：所述第一信道所在的时隙， 所述第一信道所在的时隙的相邻时隙，与第一信道所在的时隙之间间隔E5个时隙的时隙，E5为非负整数。例如E5为0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10的一个。可选地，E5的取值与第一信道的子载波间隔索引相关。具体的，E5的取值与第一信道的子载波间隔索引成线性关系，例如E5为1*(第一信道的子载波间隔索引+1)，或2*(第一信道的子载波间隔索引+1)，或3*(第一信道的子载波间隔索引+1)，4*(第一信道的子载波间隔索引+1)等。本申请实施例中，15kHz的子载波间隔对应子载波间隔索引为0，30kHz的子载波间隔对应子载波间隔索引为1，60kHz的子载波间隔对应子载波间隔索引为2，120kHz的子载波间隔对应子载波间隔索引为3。本申请实施例中，子载波间隔与索引号也可以具有其他对应关系，本申请实施例对此不做限定。
S202、所述终端设备根据所述一个或多个时间单元的信息，确定所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合。
可以理解的是，该一个或多个时间单元是符号配置集合的时域范围。具体地，符号配置列表(包括上行符号配置列表和下行符号配置列表)可以是预先定义或通过高层信令预先配置的符号配置列表。符号配置集合为上述符号配置列表的子集或全集。
可选地，对一个或多个时间单元中的每一个时间单元对应的有效的符号配置集合取并集，得到所述一个或多个时间单元对应的符号配置集合。
可选地，对符号配置列表中的每一个符号配置，同时通过比较该符号配置在所述一个或多个时间单元对应的多个时间单元中的有效性确定该下行符号配置是否有效，从而进一步确定由有效的符号配置组成的所述一个或多个时间单元对应的符号配置集合。
关于符号配置集合以及符号配置列表的具体说明可以参考图3所示实施例的相关内容，在此不做赘述。
S203、所述终端设备根据所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合，确定候选的参考信号的时域资源。
所述候选的参考信号的时域资源可以为在所述符号配置集合中的以下一个或多个符号：所述符号配置集合中起始符号最早对应的符号配置中的第一个符号；所述符号配置集合中起始符号最晚对应的符号配置中的最后一个符号；所述符号配置集合中起始符号最早对应的符号配置中的最后一个符号；所述符号配置集合中起始符号最晚的符号配置中的第一个符号；所述符号配置集合中终止符号最早对应的符号配置中的第一个符号；所述符号配置集合中终止符号最晚对应的符号配置中的最后一个符号；所述符号配置集合中终止符号最早对应的符号配置中的最后一个符号；所述符号配置集合中终止符号最晚的符号配置中的第一个符号；所述符号配置集合中每个符号配置中的第一个符号；所述符号配置集合中每个符号配置中的最后一个符号。
可选地，S203包括以下步骤：将所述符号配置集合划分为一个或多个符号配置子集，并根据所述一个或多个符号配置子集，确定候选的参考信号的时域资源。
具体的，每个符号配置子集包含一个或多个符号配置。具体实现中，终端设备可以将符号配置集合中的重叠的有效的符号配置划分为一个符号配置子集。
可能的方式1，网络设备和终端设备可以按照如下方法对符号配置集合GROUP中的符号配置进行分组得到多个符号配置子集Subset(j)，j为符号配置子集Subset(j)在GROUP中 的索引，j为非负整数。
(1)设j的初始值等于0。
(2)确定GROUP中的符号配置对应的最后一个符号的符号索引中的最小值为n。可以理解的是，符号配置对应的最后一个符号的符号索引由所述符号配置中的起始符号的索引信息以及持续符号数信息确定的，即最后一个符号的符号索引为起始符号的索引与持续符号数之和再减一。
(3)将GROUP中起始符号的符号索引小于或等于n的符号配置分配到同一个符号配置子集Subset(j)；
更新GROUP：将Subset(j)中的符号配置从GROUP中删除；
更新j的取值为j加1。
(4)重复执行步骤(2)和(3)直到GROUP为空集。
可能的方式2，网络设备和终端设备可以按照如下方法对符号配置集合GROUP中的符号配置进行分组得到多个符号配置子集Subset(j)，j为符号配置子集Subset(j)在Group中的索引，j为非负整数。
(1)设j的初始值等于0。
(2)确定GROUP中的符号配置对应的第一个符号的符号索引中的最大值为m。可以理解的是，符号配置对应的第一个符号的符号索引由所述符号配置中的起始符号的索引信息确定的，即第一个符号的符号索引为起始符号的索引。
(3)将GROUP中起始符号的符号索引大于或等于m的符号配置分配到同一个符号配置子集Subset(j)；
更新GROUP：将Subset(j)中的符号配置从GROUP中删除；
更新j的取值为j加1。
(4)重复执行步骤(2)和(3)直到GROUP为空集。
上述对符号配置集合GROUP中的符号配置进行分组的过程中，可以在分组之前将GROUP赋值给一个临时变量GROUP_TEMP，上述过程中对GROUP的操作替换为对GROUP_TEMP的操作，从而使得GROUP在这个分组的过程中保持不变。使用可能的方式1或者方式2，以图6为例，符号配置集合包括4个符号配置，有效的符号配置包括PDSCH2和PDSCH4两个符号配置。终端设备可以将重叠的有效符号配置划分为一个符号配置子集，每个子集中的一个时域资源为候选的参考信号的时域资源。以图7为例，划分为4个子集。具体的，在上述的描述中，以上行传输为例，符号配置子集为上行符号配置子集，符号配置集合为上行符号配置集合，符号配置为上行符号配置，最后一个符号为最后一个上行符号，起始符号为起始上行符号。同样的，以下行传输为例，符号配置子集为下行符号配置子集，符号配置集合为下行符号配置集合，符号配置为下行符号配置，最后一个符号为最后一个下行符号，起始符号为起始下行符号。
所述候选的参考信号的时域资源可以是预先定义的，为是所述符号配置集合中每个符号配置子集中的一个或多个符号，或者，所述符号配置集合中所有符号中的一个或多个符号。例如为在所述一个或多个符号配置子集中的以下一个或多个符号：所述一个或多个符号配置集合中最早的符号配置子集中的第一个符号；所述一个或多个符号配置集合中最后 的符号配置子集中的最后一个符号；所述一个或多个符号配置集合中最早的符号配置子集中的最后一个符号；所述一个或多个符号配置集合中最后的符号配置子集中的第一个符号；所述一个或多个符号配置集合中每个符号配置子集中的第一个符号；所述一个或多个符号配置集合中每个符号配置子集中的最后一个符号。其中，最早的符号配置子集可以是子集索引号最小的符号配置子集，也可以是子集索引号最大的符号配置子集，也可以是起始符号最早对应的符号配置子集，也可以是终止符号最早对应的符号配置子集。最后的符号配置子集可以是子集索引号最小的符号配置子集，也可以是子集索引号最大的符号配置子集，也可以是起始符号最晚对应的符号配置子集，也可以是终止符号最晚对应的符号配置子集。
所述候选的参考信号的时域资源可以是高层信令配置的，具体为所述符号配置集合中高层信令配置的每个符号配置子集中的一个或多个符号，或者，所述符号配置集合中高层信令配置的所有符号中的一个或多个符号。具体地，所述高层信令可以是用于确定候选的参考信号的时域资源所在的每个符号配置子集中的第几个符号，或所述符号配置集合中所有符号中的第几个符号，也可以是用于确定候选的参考信号的时域资源所在的所述符号配置集合中符号索引和/或时隙索引，也可以是用于确定所述符号配置集合中候选的参考信号的时域资源出现的周期和/或符号索引。
S204、网络设备发送下行控制信息。
相应地，所述终端设备接收下行控制信息。
其中，所述下行控制信息包括第一指示信息。所述第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域资源；第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源。
该候选的参考信号的时域资源为S203中根据在所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合确定的时域资源，或者S203中根据在所述一个或多个符号配置子集确定的时域资源。可选地，候选的参考信号的时域资源包括多个时域资源，在本步骤中，通过下行控制信息具体指示其中一个时域资源。
可选地，对于下行传输，该方法还包括S205：所述网络设备根据下行控制信息发送第一信道。相应地，所述终端设备根据下行控制信息接收第一信道。可选地，S205还包括：所述网络设备根据第一指示信息发送参考信号。相应的，终端设备根据第一指示信息接收参考信号。具体可参考前述实施例的描述，在此不再赘述。
可选地，对于上行传输，S205的替换步骤包括：所述网络设备接收第一信道。相应地，所述终端设备发送第一信道。可选地，S205还包括：所述网络设备根据第一指示信息接收参考信号。相应的，终端设备根据第一指示信息发送参考信号。具体可参考前述实施例的描述，在此不再赘述。
根据本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法，在NR系统中灵活配置多种PUSCH或PDSCH长度的情况下，使用有效的符号配置来确定候选的参考信号的时域资源，避开反向的符号位置(例如对应PDSCH避开上行符号，对于PUSCH避开下行符号)，从而可以灵活确定有效的参考信号可发送的位置。
如图8所示，本申请实施例提供了又一种通信方法的流程示意图，该方法可包括以下步骤：
S301、网络设备发送第一信息。
相应的，终端设备接收第一信息。
该第一信息用于指示终端设备传输N个第一信道，其中，N为大于或等于2的整数。这里的传输信道包括接收信道或发送信道。第一信息可以是下行控制信息和/或高层信令。如图4a所示，对于下行传输，网络设备根据第一信息发送第一信道，终端设备根据第一信息接收第一信道。如图4b所示，对于上行传输，网络设备根据第一信息接收第一信道，终端设备根据第一信息发送第一信道。具体下行控制信息的发送和接收可参考图3所示实施例的S102，在此不再赘述。例如，所述第一信道为PUSCH信道。
在上行传输中，S302、终端设备根据第二信道发送参考信号。
相应的，网络设备接收参考信号。
其中，所述第二信道为所述N个第一信道中在一个时间单元内按时域顺序的第X个第一信道，其中，X为大于或等于1的整数，且X小于或等于N。
其中，时间单元可以是一个或多个符号，也可以是一个或多个时隙，也可以是N个第一信道所在的时间单元。
可选的，所述第二信道为所述N个第一信道中在每个时间单元内的按时域顺序的第X个第一信道。可以理解为，当N个第一信道的时域资源包含多个时间单元时，在每个时间单元中的第二信道之中均传输参考信号。可以理解的是，在每个时间单元中的第二信道对应的X的取值可以相同，也可以不相同。
可选地，S302包括：终端设备根据第二信道，在第二信道所在的时域资源中的第一符号发送参考信号；或者，S302包括：终端设备根据第二信道，在第二信道所在的时域资源之前的第一符号发送参考信号。
作为S302的替换步骤，在下行传输中，网络设备根据第二信道发送参考信号。
相应的，终端设备根据第二信道接收参考信号。
可选地，S302包括：终端设备根据第二信道，在第二信道所在的时域资源中的第一符号接收参考信号；或者，S302包括：终端设备根据第二信道，在第二信道所在的时域资源之前的第一符号接收参考信号。
可选地，所述第一符号为第二信道所在的时域资源之中的按时域顺序的第Y个符号，Y为大于或等于1的正整数，所述第一符号的数量小于或等于N。示例性的，例如第二信道所在的时域资源为符号7至符号11，Y为2，那么第一符号为符号8。
可选地，所述第一符号为第二信道所在的时域资源之前的第Y个符号，即第一符号是第二信道的起始符号之前的第Y个符号，Y为大于或等于1的正整数，所述第一符号的数量小于或等于N。示例性的，例如第二信道的起始符号为符号7，Y为1，那么第一符号为符号6。
在一种实现方式中，所述第一信息指示的第一信道包括两个或两个以上的第一信道，所述两个或两个以上的第一信道承载相同的传输块，所述参考信号的时域资源包括所述两 个或两个以上的第一信道中的第二信道所在的时域资源中的第一符号；其中，所述第二信道为满足以下一种或多种条件的第一信道：时域上最早的第一信道，第一冗余版本对应的第一信道，第X个第一信道，X为小于或等于所述两个或两个以上第一信道的信道数。可以理解的，时域上最早的第一信道，可以理解为时域上最早起始符号或终止符号对应的第一信道。第一冗余版本对应的第一信道，可以理解为第一信道中传输的数据对应的冗余版本为第一冗余版本。第一符号为以下一种或多种：第一个符号，最后一个符号，前X1个符号。X1为大于或等于1的正整数，且X1小于或等于所述两个或两个以上第一信道的信道数。第一符号和第二信道也可以是其他情况，本申请不做限定。
可选的，所述两个或两个以上的第一信道中至少有两个第一信道所在时域资源的起始符号之间符号间隔小于14个符号。可选的，所述两个或两个以上的第一信道中至少有第一信道A和第一信道B，第一信道A所在时域资源的起始符号是第一信道B所在时域资源的终止符号之后的第一个符号。
可选的，所述第一信息包括第一信道的重复次数，和/或，N个所述第一信道中的一个或多个第一信道所在的时域资源的信息。可选的，多个第一信道所在的时域资源的信息可以是相同的，则第一信息可以包括一个第一信道所在的时域资源的信息。
可以理解的，所述第二信道为有效的信道。有效的信道包括有效的上行信道和有效的下行信道。其中，有效的上行信道的含义为：若第一信道为上行信道，那么所述特定信道所在的时域资源上不包括任意一个下行符号。有效的下行信道的含义为：若第一信道为下行信道，那么所述特定信道所在的时域资源上不包括任意一个上行符号。所述第一符号为有效的符号。有效的符号的含义为：若第一信道为上行信道，那么所述第一符号应为上行符号；若第一信道为下行信道，那么所述第一符号应为下行符号。
可选地，第一冗余版本可以是0和/或3。可以理解的是，当第一信道对应的冗余版本不为冗余版本0和/或冗余版本3时，那么第一信道所在的时域资源上也可以有参考信号也可以没有参考信号；第一信道对应的冗余版本为冗余版本0和/或冗余版本3时，那么第一信道所在的时域资源或第一信道所在的时域资源之前上可以有参考信号。由于NR系统中冗余版本0和冗余版本3是对应携带全部解码信息的数据传输，因此冗余版本0和冗余版本3对应的数据传输相对更加重要，即这两个冗余版本对应的第一信道上应携带参考信号，以便接收设备通过参考信号解调译码此数据传输。进一步的，一种实现方式，冗余版本0对应第一信道和/或冗余版本3对应的第一信道上的第一个符号传输DMRS。另一种实现方式，冗余版本0对应第一信道和/或冗余版本3对应的第一信道所在的时域资源的起始符号之前的前X2个符号传输DMRS。可以理解为，多个第一信道不对应第一冗余版本的第一信道上不传输参考信号。另一种实现方式，第一冗余版本是1和/或2。
可选地，以上举例中第一个符号也可以是为第X2个符号，X2大于等于1的正整数。可选地，X2为1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14中的一个或多个。所述X2可以是预先定义或高层信令配置。可选地，以上举例中第一个符号也可以是特定信道上的最后一个符号，本申请不做限定。可以理解为特定信道的其他符号上不传输参考信号。
可选的，在网络设备或终端设备传输参考信道之前，还包括：终端设备向网络设备发送能力信息，所述能力信息用于指示所述终端设备具有在N个第一信道中的部分信道上传 输参考信号的能力。相应的，网络设备接收能力信息。即可以理解为可以在第二信道所在的时域资源之中或之前传输参考信号的能力。进一步的，所述能力信息还可以用于指示所述终端设备不具有在N个第一信道中的部分信道上传输参考信号的能力。即此时终端设备需要在N个第一信道之中的每个第一信道上均传输参考信号。
可选的，所述方法还包括：所述网络设备发送第二信息。相应的，所述终端设备接收第二信息。所述第二信息用于指示所述终端设备可以在N个第一信道中的部分信道上传输参考信号。
可选的，所述终端设备接收第三信息，所述第三信息用于指示所述终端设备不可以在N个第一信道中的部分信道上传输参考信号。当终端设备接收第三信息时，那么终端设备需要在N个第一信道之中的每个第一信道上均传输参考信号。
其中第二信息和第三信息可以是下行控制信息中的信息，也可以是高层信令中的信息，本申请不做限定。
可选的，在S302之前还包括步骤：网络设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示传输所述参考信号。相应的，终端设备接收第一指示信息。可以理解的是，在这个步骤情况下，若终端设备收到的第一指示信息没有指示传输所述参考信号，则终端设备不会在特定信道上传输参考信号。
可以理解，在图8所示实施方式中所述的参考信号可以是本申请其他实施方式所述的候选的参考信号中的一个或者多个参考信号，所述参考信号的时域资源的获取方法可以参考本申请其他实施方式的具体描述，在此不做赘述。
根据本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法，通过根据网络设备发送的第一信息，该第一信息指示两个或两个以上的第一信道，在该两个或两个以上的第一信道中的一个第二信道中的参考信号的时域资源上传输参考信号，从而网络设备能够以较小的开销，准确地指示参考信号的时域资源，网络设备/终端设备在该参考信号的时域资源上传输参考信号，从而提高了系统传输的效率，例如，在重复传输第一信道的场景下，采用上述通信方法，则无需在每个第一信道上发送参考信号，节约了系统开销，提升了传输效率。
如图9所示，本申请实施例提供了又一种通信方法的流程示意图，该方法可包括以下步骤：
S401、终端设备获取一个或多个时间单元中候选的参考信号的时域资源。
在下行传输中，终端设备需要接收参考信号，网络设备需要发送参考信号，则在S401中，终端设备和/或网络设备获取一个或多个时间单元中候选的参考信号的时域资源。相应的，在上行传输中，网络设备需要接收参考信号，终端设备需要发送参考信号，则网络设备和/或终端设备获取一个或多个时间单元中候选的参考信号的时域资源。
关于步骤S401的具体实现可参考图3所示实施例中的步骤S101，在此不再赘述。
S402、网络设备发送下行控制信息。
相应的，终端设备接收下行控制信息。
其中，下行控制信息包括第一指示信息。
其中，第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：
第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域资源；或
第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或
所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源。
本实施例中，用于传输参考信号的时域资源可以是第一参考信号的时域资源，也可以是第二参考信号的时域资源。此外，在上述一个或多个时间单元上也可以没有参考信号的时域资源。其中，上述表1～表5中的参考信号的时域资源的索引是预先定义的，而候选的参考信号的时域资源则是需要终端设备在接收参考信号前获取的。
与图3所示实施例的不同在于，所述下行控制信息包括第一指示信息，但不包含第一上行信道的传输信息。关于步骤S402的其它具体实现可参考图3所示实施例中的步骤S102，在此不再赘述。
本申请的一个实施方式中，第一指示信息指示的是第一参考信号的时域资源，则终端设备根据第一指示信息确定参考信号的时域资源为第一参考信号的时域资源。
在本申请的另一个实施方式中，第一指示信息指示的是第二参考信号的时域资源，则终端设备根据第一指示信息确定参考信号的时域资源为第二参考信号的时域资源。
在本申请的又一个实施方式中，第一指示信息指示的是所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源。若第一信道是上行信道，终端设备将不会在所述一个或多个时间单元上发送参考信号。若第一信道是下行信道，终端设备将不会在所述一个或多个时间单元上接收参考信号。
由于在步骤S402中下行控制信息仅包括第一指示信息，则可选地，在下行传输中，所述方法还包括：S403、网络设备根据所述下行控制信息发送参考信号。相应的，终端设备根据所述下行控制信息接收参考信号。
在上行传输中，作为S403的替换的步骤，所述方法还包括：终端设备根据所述下行控制信息，发送参考信号。相应的，网络设备接收参考信号。
关于步骤S403的具体实现可参考图3所示实施例中的步骤S103，在此不再赘述。
根据本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法，网络设备通过下行控制信息指示进行参考信号的传输所采用的时域资源，或在一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源，网络设备能够以较小的开销，准确地指示灵活配置的参考信号的时域资源，终端设备能够准确地确定灵活配置的参考信号的时域资源的信息，从而提高了系统传输的效率。在本申请的一些实施方式中，上述第一指示信息还包括第一参考信号的时域资源与第一信道的时域资源之间的偏移值，所述偏移值包括以下的一种或多种：
所述第一参考信号的时域资源所在的时隙与所述第一信道所在的时隙之间的时隙偏移值；
所述第一参考信号的时域资源的起始符号与所述第一信道的起始符号之间的符号偏移值；
所述第一参考信号的时域资源的起始符号与所述第一信道的终止符号之间的符号偏移值；
所述第一参考信号的时域资源的终止符号与所述第一信道的终止符号之间的符号偏移值。
在本申请的一些实施方式中，当所述第一指示信息用于指示第一参考信号的时域资源时，所述第一指示信息还包括时隙信息和/或符号信息。所述时隙信息包括以下一种或多种：绝对时隙索引，相对所述第一信道所在时隙的时隙偏移索引。所述符号信息包括以下一种或多种：绝对符号索引，相对所述第一信道的起始符号的符号偏移索引，相对所述第一信道的终止符号的符号偏移索引。
所述时隙信息为绝对时隙索引。例如，绝对时隙索引为时隙索引D1，那么所述第一指示信息指示的参考信号的时域资源为所述一个或多个时间单元中的时隙索引D1上的一个或多个符号。其中，D1为非负整数。
所述时隙信息为相对所述第一信道所在时隙的时隙偏移索引。例如，所述时隙信息为第一信道所在的时隙之后的第D3个时隙，或者，第一信道所在的时隙之前的第D2个时隙。其中，D2和D3为非负整数。
所述符号信息为绝对符号索引。例如，绝对符号索引为符号索引E1，那么所述第一指示信息指示第一参考信号的时域资源为所述一个或多个时间单元中的一个或多个时隙上的符号索引E1，即可以理解为这一或多个slot上的第E1+1个符号为所述第一指示信息指示的参考信号的时域资源。其中，E1为非负整数，例如E1可以为0，1，2，3，4，5，6，7，8，9，10，11，12，13中的一个。
所述符号信息为相对所述第一信道的起始符号或终止符号的符号偏移索引，例如，所述符号信息为第一信道所在的时域资源的第一个符号，或者，为第一信道所在的时域资源的最后一个符号，或者，为第一信道所在的时域资源的终止符号之后的第一个符号，或者，第一信道所在的时域资源的起始符号之前的第E2个符号，或者，第一信道所在的时域资源的终止符号之后的第E2个符号。其中，E2为正整数，例如E2可以为1，2，3，4，5，6，7，8，9，10，11，12，13，1*14，2*14，3*14中的一个。
需要说明的是，在本申请中，所述候选的参考信号的时域资源应为和第一信道同向的时域资源。这里的同向是指对相同方向的信息传输进行控制，这里的方向包括上行方向和下行方向。上行方向是指从终端设备发送到网络设备，下行方向是指从网络设备发送到终端设备。
若第一信道是下行信道，那么所述候选的参考信号的时域资源是下行符号和/或下行时隙。例如，所述一个或多个时间单元中时序上最后一个的时间单元中的第一个符号，可以理解为所述一个或多个时间单元中时序上最后一个的时间单元中的第一个下行符号。
若第一信道是上行信道，那么所述候选的参考信号的时域资源是上行符号和/或上行时隙。那么，所述一个或多个时间单元中时序上最早一个的时间单元中的第一个符号，可以理解为所述一个或多个时间单元中时序上最早一个的时间单元中的第一个上行符号。
可选地，第一信道为上行信道，网络设备将使用第一信道之前的最近的一次接收到的参考信号，对所述第一信道进行解调和译码。可选地，第一信道为下行信道，终端设备将使用第一信道之前的最近的一次接收到的参考信号，对所述第一信道进行解调和译码。可 以理解的是，这里接收到的参考信号是第一指示信息指示的参考信号。
可选地，第一信道为下行信道，若在第一信道所在的时域资源的起始符号之前的第E3个符号内没有接收到参考信号，和/或，在第一信道所在的时域资源中的符号上没有接收到参考信号，和/或，在第一信道所在的时域资源的终止符号之后的第E4个符号之前没有接收到参考信号，那么终端设备将不解调第一信道。其中，E3和E4为非负整数，E3和E4的取值大于等于0。可选地，E3和E4的取值小于或等于第一门限值，第一门限值可以为14,28,42和56中的一个，也可以是其他取值，本申请不做限定。进一步的，终端设备向网络设备反馈的第一信道的解码结果为NACK。
可选地，本申请的一些实施方式中，还需进一步确定第一指示信息对应的比特状态值和/或比特数。那么网络设备或终端设备可以根据第一指示信息对应的比特状态值确定第一指示信息。下面详细描述第一指示信息的比特状态值和/或比特数：
其中，第一指示信息的比特数可以是大于或等于1的正整数，例如1,2,3,4,5,6。第一指示信息的比特数可以根据以下至少一种方式确定：通过候选的参考信号的时域资源确定，预先定义，高层信令配置的。其中，该候选的参考信号的时域资源是根据步骤S101中描述方式确定，这里不再赘述。
可选地，第一指示信息的比特数与候选的参考信号的时域资源的个数相关。具体而言，终端设备或网络设备可以根据候选的参考信号的时域资源的个数，确定第一指示信息的比特数。具体的实现方式可以是以下实现方式F1-F4中的任一种。
在实现方式F1中，第一指示信息的比特数为ceiling(log2(1+Z1))个比特。其中，ceiling表示向上取整，Z1为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源的个数。可以理解的是，1表示第一指示信息用于指示的信息还包括第二参考信号的时域资源的信息或者表示没有参考信号的时域资源的信息。因此，此时通过第一指示信息指示的为1+Z1个信息中的一个信息，相应地，第一指示信息的比特数为ceiling(log2(1+Z1))。这样使用的比特数较少，因此可以降低第一指示信息占用的比特数。其中，Z1为大于或等于1的正整数，例如Z1可以是1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8和9中的一个。Z1是预先定义的，或高层信令配置的，或者根据符号配置集合确定的，或者根据符号配置子集确定的，在此不做限定。
可选地，若2的n次幂大于1+Z1，那么就有一个或多个保留(reserved)值。其中，n为第一指示信息的比特数量。
具体实现中，候选的参考信号的时域资源可以为预先定义的。例如，候选的参考信号的时域资源的个数为3，以表10为例，第一指示信息可以表示表10中的一个信息。其中，比特状态值00对应的信息为所述一个或多个时间单元中没有参考信号的时域资源或第二参考信号的时域资源；比特状态值01对应的信息为第一参考信号的时域资源1，例如可以是多个时间单元中时序上最早一个的时间单元中的第一个符号；比特状态值10对应的信息为第一参考信号的时域资源2，例如可以是多个时间单元中时序上最后一个的时间单元中的最后一个符号；比特状态值11对应的信息为第一参考信号的时域资源3，即所述一个或多个时间单元中每个时间单元中的最后一个符号。表11为示例的另外一种第一指示信息的比特状态值与第一指示信息用于指示的信息的对应关系。在表11中，比特状态值11对应 的信息为一个或多个时间单元中没有参考信号的时域资源或第二参考信号的时域资源。第二参考信号的时域资源可以理解为使用表1-表5中的参考信号对应的时域资源。进一步的，若第一指示信息指示的为第二参考信号资源，可以理解为此时不进行参考信号共享，即使用现有技术中的方式去确定参考信号的时域资源。
可以理解的是，表10和表11中的第一指示信息的比特状态值和第一指示信息用于指示的信息的对应关系，可以是其他对应关系，第一指示信息用于指示的信息也可以是其他值，在此不作限制。
表10
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000010
表11
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000011
具体实现中，候选的参考信号的时域资源可以为预先定义的和/或高层信令配置的。例如，候选的参考信号的时域资源的个数为2，以表12为例，第一指示信息可以表示表12中的一个信息。其中，比特状态值00对应的信息为所述一个或多个时间单元中没有参考信号的时域资源或第二参考信号的时域资源；比特状态值01对应的信息为第一参考信号的时域资源1，例如可以是多个时间单元中或每个时间单元中的第X1个符号；比特状态值10对应的信息为第一参考信号的时域资源2，例如可以是多个时间单元中或每个时间单元中的第X2个符号；比特状态值11对应的信息为保留值。
在一个示例中，第X1个符号可以是针对一个时隙(slot)中从符号0开始计数的。当X1＝1，那么这个01对应的就是符号0。在另一个示例中，第X1个符号也可以是第Z个有效的符号配置中的第X1个符号。例如Z＝2，那么就是第2个有效的符号配置中的第X1个符号。如图6所示，那就是PDSCH4中的第X1个符号，当X1＝1，那么这个01对应的就 是符号10。在又一个示例中，对于上行传输，第X1个符号还可以是每次跳频传输的第一个符号开始计数。
可以理解的是，表12中的第一指示信息的比特状态值和第一指示信息用于指示的信息的对应关系，可以是其他对应关系，第一指示信息用于指示的信息也可以是其他值，在此不作限制。
表12
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000012
具体实现中，候选的参考信号的时域资源可以根据第一信道确定。可以理解为，候选的参考信号的时域资源可以根据第二参考信号的时域资源确定，该候选的参考信号的时域资源为所述第二参考信号的时域资源中的一个符号。例如，预先定义或高层信令配置以DMRS额外位置指示信息A指示第一信道的候选的参考信号的时域资源。例如A＝3，如图10所示，若第一信道的符号数为8个符号，采用PUSCH映射类型B，根据上述表1，那么第二参考信号的时域资源为F0，F3和F6，那么候选的参考信号的时域资源为F0，F3和F6，分别对应当前调度的第1个符号，第4个符号和第7个符号。则第一参考信号的时域资源为F0，F3和F6中的一个。第一指示信息的比特状态值与第一指示信息用于指示的信息的对应关系如表13所示。
以表13为例，候选的参考信号的时域资源的个数为3，第一指示信息可以表示表13中的一个信息。其中，比特状态值00对应的信息为所述一个或多个时间单元中没有参考信号的时域资源或者第二参考信号的时域资源；比特状态值01对应的信息为第一参考信号的时域资源1，例如可以为F0(对应当前调度的第1个符号)；比特状态值10对应的信息为第一参考信号的时域资源2，例如可以为F3(对应当前调度的第4个符号)；比特状态值11对应的信息为第一参考信号的时域资源3，例如可以为F6(对应当前调度的第7个符号)。
可以理解的是，表13中的第一指示信息的比特状态值和第一指示信息用于指示的信息的对应关系，可以是其他对应关系，第一指示信息用于指示的信息也可以是其他值，在此不作限制。
表13
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000013
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000014
在实现方式F2中，第一指示信息的比特数为ceiling(log2(2+Z1))个比特。其中，ceiling表示向上取整，Z1为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源的个数。可以理解的是，2表示第二参考信号的时域资源的信息和表示没有参考信号的时域资源的信息。因此，可以通过第一指示信息指示2+Z1个信息中的一个信息，则第一指示信息的比特数为ceiling(log2(2+Z1))。这样使用的比特数较少，因此可以降低第一指示信息占用的比特数。
相对于实现方式F1，该实现方式增加了一个比特状态，即第一指示信息用于指示的信息还包括第二参考信号的时域资源和所述一个或多个时间单元中没有参考信号的时域资源两种信息。例如表14，比特状态值00对应的信息为所述一个或多个时间单元中没有参考信号的时域资源，比特状态值11对应的信息为第二参考信号的时域资源。其它比特状态值与第一指示信息用于指示的信息的对应关系、以及候选的参考信号的时域资源可以参考实现方式F1，在此不再赘述。
具体实现中，候选的参考信号的时域资源可以是上述预先定义的和/或高层信令配置的。表14与前述表10至表13的不同点在于，采用比特状态值00表示所述一个或多个时间单元中没有参考信号的时域资源，且采用比特状态值11表示第二参考信号的时域资源。可以理解的是，表14中的第一指示信息的比特状态值和第一指示信息用于指示的信息的对应关系，可以是其他对应关系，第一指示信息用于指示的信息也可以是其他值，在此不作限制。
表14
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000015
可选地，若2的n次幂大于2+Z1，那么就有一个或多个保留值，n为第一指示信息的比特数量。如表15所示，候选的参考信号的时域资源的个数为4，第一指示信息可以表示表15中的一个信息。相对于表14，在表15中增加两个保留值，即比特状态值101和110分别表示两个保留值。
表15
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000016
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000017
又例如，如表16所示，候选的参考信号的时域资源的个数为6，与表15的区别在于，表16中，第一参考信号的时域资源可以是预先定义的和/或高层信令配置的。例如比特状态值001对应的信息为第一参考信号的时域资源1。该第一参考信号的时域资源1是高层信令配置的。又例如，第一参考信号的时域资源2～6是预先定义的，例如，第一参考信号的时域资源1为高层信令配置的第2个符号或第3个符号，第一参考信号的时域资源2～6可以是第一信道的时域资源的终止符号后的第一个符号，或，一个时间单元上的第Y个符号。
表16
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000018
在实现方式F3中，第一指示信息的比特数为1+Z1个比特。其中，Z1为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源的个数。可以理解的是，1表示为第一指示信息用于指示的信息还包括第二参考信号的时域资源的信息或者表示没有参考信号的时域资源的信息。因此，此时1+Z1个信息需通过第一指示信息指示，于是第一指示信息的比特数为1+Z1。第一指示信息的比特与1+Z1个信息一一对应。实现方式F3较灵活，网络设备可以通过第一指示信息同时通知多个候选的参考信号的时域资源，当终端设备处于高速移动场景或者需要传输高可靠性的业务时，网络设备可以通过第一指示信息通知多个候选的参考信号的时域资源， 以使得在上行传输中终端设备发送多个参考信号增加网络设备的信道估计准确度，在下行传输中网络设备发送多个参考信号增加终端设备的信道估计准确度，从而提高系统传输成功率。
例如Z1＝2，如表17所示，可以理解第一指示信息的比特数为3bit，其中1bit对应一个或多个时间单元中没有参考信号的时域资源或第二参考信号的时域资源，其余2bit分别对应第一参考信号的时域资源1和第一参考信号的时域资源2。可以理解的是，当第一指示信息同时指示第一参考信号的时域资源资源和第二参考信号的时域资源资源时，网络设备或终端设备可以只发送其中一个参考信号，也可以都发送，也可以都不发送。表17，以都发送为例。
表17
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000019
在实现方式F4中，第一指示信息的比特数是Z1个比特，或者，也可以是ceiling(log2(Z1))个比特。当第一指示信息的比特数是ceiling(log2(Z1))个比特，例如Z1＝4，如表18所示。与前述实现方式不同在于，这里第一指示用于指示的信息仅为第一参考信号的时域资源。当第一指示信息的比特数是Z1个比特，例如Z1＝2，如表19所示。第一指示信息的比特状态值与第一指示信息用于指示的信息的对应关系，可以是其它对应关系，在此不作限制。
表18
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000020
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000021
表19
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000022
可选地，第一指示信息的比特数与符号配置子集的个数相关。具体而言，终端设备或网络设备可以根据符号配置子集的个数，确定第一指示信息的比特数。具体的实现方式可以是以下实现方式F5-F8中的一种。
在实现方式F5中，第一指示信息的比特数量为ceiling(log2(1+Z2))个比特。其中，Z2为所述符号配置子集的个数。可以理解的是，1表示第一指示信息用于指示的信息包括第二参考信号的时域资源的信息或者表示没有参考信号的时域资源的信息。具体实现中，候选的参考信号的时域资源为所述一个或多个符号配置子集中的以下一个或多个符号具体参照S203中的方式，这里不再赘述。符号配置子集可以由上述步骤中的方式确定，这里不再赘述。
例如，符号配置子集的个数为3，以表20为例，第一指示信息可以表示表20中的一个信息。其中，比特状态值00对应的信息为所述一个或多个时间单元中没有参考信号的时域资源或第二参考信号的时域资源；比特状态值01对应的信息为第一参考信号的时域资源1，例如，第一参考信号的时域资源1对应第一符号配置集合子集，如可以是第一符号配置子集中的第一个符号；比特状态值10对应的信息为第一参考信号的时域资源2，例如第一参考信号的时域资源2对应第二符号配置集合子集，如可以是第二符号配置子集中的第一个符号；比特状态值11对应的信息为第一参考信号的时域资源3，例如第一参考信号的时域资源3对应第三符号配置集合子集，如可以是第三符号配置子集中的第一个符号。第二参考信号的时域资源和上述方式中描述相同，这里不再赘述。表21为示例的另外一种第一指示信息的比特状态值与第一指示信息用于指示的信息的对应关系。在表21中，比特状态值11对应的信息为所述一个或多个时间单元中没有参考信号的时域资源或第二参考信号的时域资源。可以理解的是，表20和表21中的第一指示信息的比特状态值和第一指示信息用于指示的信息的对应关系，可以是其他对应关系，在此不作限制。第一指示信息的比特状态值也可以对应第一符号配置子集中的其他符号，在此不作限制。
表20
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000023
表21
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000024
可选地，若2的n次幂大于1+Z2，那么就有一个或多个保留值。其中，n为第一指示信息的比特数量。如表22所示，相比表20和表21，由于表22中3比特对应8个状态，而这里只有5个信息可以指示，因此增加了比特状态值，该比特状态值对应的信息为保留值。可选地，这里的保留值可以用于指示一个或多个时间单元中没有参考信号的时域资源。在表22中，比特状态值000对应的信息为第二参考信号的时域资源。在另外的示例中，比特状态值000对应的信息也可以为一个或多个时间单元中没有参考信号的时域资源。另外，表22中的第一指示信息的比特状态值和第一指示信息用于指示的信息的对应关系，可以是其他对应关系，在此不作限制。可选的，本申请中，全零比特状态或全1比特状态可以为一个或多个时间单元中没有参考信号的时域资源或第二参考信号的时域资源。
表22
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000025
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000026
在实现方式F6中，第一指示信息的比特数为ceiling(log2(2+Z2))个比特。其中，ceiling表示向上取整，Z2为符号配置子集的个数。可以理解的是，2为表示第一指示信息用于指示的信息包括第二参考信号的时域资源的信息和表示没有参考信号的时域资源的信息。因此，可以通过第一指示信息指示2+Z2个信息中的一个信息，则第一指示信息的比特数为ceiling(log2(2+Z2))。这样使用的比特数较少，因此可以降低第一指示信息占用的比特数。
相对于实现方式F5，该实现方式增加了一个状态，即第一指示信息用于指示的信息包括第二参考信号的时域资源和所述一个或多个时间单元中没有参考信号的时域资源两种信息。例如表23，比特状态值000对应的信息为所述一个或多个时间单元中没有参考信号的时域资源，比特状态值111对应的信息为第二参考信号的时域资源。其它比特状态值与第一指示信息用于指示的信息的对应关系、以及候选的参考信号的时域资源可以参考实现方式F5，在此不再赘述。
表23
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000027
在实现方式F7中，第一指示信息的比特数为1+Z2个比特。其中，Z2为符号配置子集的个数。可以理解的是，1为表示第一指示信息用于指示的信息包括第二参考信号的时域资源的信息或者表示没有参考信号的时域资源的信息。因此，此时1+Z2个信息需通过第一指示信息指示，于是第一指示信息的比特数为1+Z2。第一指示信息的比特与1+Z2个信息一一对应。这种指示方式灵活，网络设备可以通过第一指示信息同时通知多个符号配置子集，当终端设备处于高速移动场景或者需要传输高可靠性的业务时，网络设备可以通知多个符号配置子集，以使得在上行传输中终端设备发送多个参考信号增加网络设备的信道估计准确度，在下行传输中网络设备发送多个参考信号增加终端设备的信道估计准确度，从 而提高系统传输效率。
在实现方式F8中，第一指示信息的比特数量为Z2个比特，或者，也可以是ceiling(log2(Z2))个比特。当第一指示信息的比特数是ceiling(log2(Z2))个比特，例如表24所示，与前述实现方式不同在于，这里第一指示信息用于指示的信息仅为符号配置子集。当第一指示信息的比特数是Z2个比特，例如Z2＝2，如表25所示。第一指示信息的比特状态值与第一指示信息用于指示的信息的对应关系，可以是其它对应关系，在此不作限制。
表24
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000028
表25
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000029
可选地，第一指示信息的比特数量与符号配置集合中符号配置的个数相关。具体而言，终端设备或网络设备可以根据符号配置集合中符号配置的个数，确定第一指示信息的比特数。具体的实现方式可以是以下F9-F12中的一种。
在实现方式F9中，第一指示信息的比特数为ceiling(log2(1+Z3))个比特。其中，Z3是所述符号配置集合中符号配置的个数。可以理解的是，1表示第一指示信息用于指示的信息包括第二参考信号的时域资源的信息或者表示没有参考信号的时域资源的信息。因此，此时通过第一指示信息指示的为1+Z3个信息中的一个信息，相应地，第一指示信息的比特数为ceiling(log2(1+Z3))。这样使用的比特数较少，因此可以降低第一指示信息占用的比特数。
具体实现中，所述候选的参考信号的时域资源可以为所述符号配置集合中的以下一个或多个符号：所述符号配置集合中最早的符号配置中的第一个符号；所述符号配置集合中最后的符号配置中的最后一个符号；所述符号配置集合中最早的符号配置中的最后一个符 号；所述符号配置集合中最后的符号配置中的第一个符号；所述符号配置集合中每个符号配置中的第一个符号；所述符号配置集合中每个符号配置中的最后一个符号。其中，最早的符号配置可以是符号配置索引号最小的符号配置，也可以是符号配置索引号最大的符号配置，也可以是起始符号最早对应的符号配置，也可以是终止符号最早对应的符号配置。最后的符号配置可以是符号配置索引号最小的符号配置，也可以是符号配置索引号最大的符号配置，也可以是起始符号最晚对应的符号配置，也可以是终止符号最晚对应的符号配置。
例如，符号配置集合中符号配置的个数为3，以表26为例，第一指示信息可以表示表26中的一个信息。其中，比特状态值00对应的信息为所述一个或多个时间单元中没有参考信号的时域资源或第二参考信号的时域资源；比特状态值01对应的信息为第一参考信号的时域资源1，例如可以是第一个符号配置；比特状态值10对应的信息为第一参考信号的时域资源2，例如可以是第二个符号配置；比特状态值11对应的信息为第一参考信号的时域资源3，例如可以是第三个符号配置。表27为示例的另外一种第一指示信息的比特状态值与第一指示信息用于指示的信息的对应关系。在表27中，比特状态值11对应的信息为第二参考信号的时域资源。第二参考信号的时域资源可第二参考信号的时域资源和上述方式中描述相同，这里不再赘述。可以理解的是，表26和表27中的第一指示信息的比特状态值和第一指示信息用于指示的信息的对应关系，可以是其他对应关系，在此不作限制。
表26
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000030
表27
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000031
可选地，若2的n次幂大于1+Z3，那么就有一个或多个保留值。其中，n为第一指示信息的比特数量。例如表28所示。与表26和表27不同的是，由于表28中3比特对应8 个状态，而这里只有5个信息可以指示，因此增加了比特状态值101、110和111，用于对应保留值。可选地，该保留值可以用于指示一个或多个时间单元中没有参考信号的时域资源，当然也可以指示其它信息。
表28
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000032
在实现方式F10中，第一指示信息的比特数量为ceiling(log2(2+Z3))个比特。其中，Z3为所述符号配置集合中符号配置的个数。可以理解的是，2为表示第一指示信息用于指示的信息包括表示第二参考信号的时域资源的信息和表示没有参考信号的时域资源的信息。因此，可以通过第一指示信息指示2+Z3个信息中的一个信息，则第一指示信息的比特数为ceiling(log2(2+Z3))。这样使用的比特数较少，因此可以降低第一指示信息占用的比特数。
相对于实现方式F9，该实现方式增加了一个状态，即第一指示信息用于指示的信息包括第二参考信号的时域资源和所述一个或多个时间单元中没有参考信号的时域资源两种信息。例如表29，比特状态值00对应的信息为所述一个或多个时间单元中没有参考信号的时域资源，比特状态值11对应的信息为第二参考信号的时域资源。其它比特状态值与第一指示信息用于指示的信息的对应关系、以及候选的参考信号的时域资源可以参考实现方式F9，在此不再赘述。
表29
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000033
可选地，若2的n次幂大于2+Z3，那么就有一个或多个保留值，n为第一指示信息的 比特数量。如表30所示，符号配置的个数为4，第一指示信息可以表示表30中的一个信息。相对于表29，在表30中，增加两个保留值，即比特状态值101和110分别表示两个保留值。
表30
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000034
在实现方式F11中，第一指示信息的比特数量为1+Z3个比特。其中，Z3为所述符号配置集合中符号配置的个数。可以理解的是，1表示第一指示信息用于指示的信息包括第二参考信号的时域资源的信息或者表示没有参考信号的时域资源的信息。因此，此时1+Z3个信息需通过第一指示信息指示，于是第一指示信息的比特数为1+Z3。第一指示信息的比特与1+Z3个信息一一对应，这种指示方式灵活，网络设备可以通过第一指示信息同时通知多个参考信号的时域资源，当终端设备处于高速移动场景或者需要传输高可靠性的业务时，网络设备可以通知多个参考信号的时域资源，以使得在上行传输中终端设备发送多个参考信号增加网络设备的信道估计准确度，在下行传输中网络设备发送多个参考信号增加终端设备的信道估计准确度，从而提高系统传输效率。
在实现方式F12中，第一指示信息的比特数量为Z3个比特，或者，也可以是ceiling(log2(Z3))个比特。当第一指示信息的比特数是ceiling(log2(Z3))个比特，例如表31所示，与前述实现方式不同在于，这里第一指示用于指示的信息仅为符号配置集合中的符号配置。当第一指示信息的比特数是Z3个比特，例如Z3＝2，如表32所示。第一指示信息的比特状态值与第一指示信息用于指示的信息的对应关系，可以是其它对应关系，在此不作限制。
表31
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000035
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000036
表32
Figure PCTCN2019104368-appb-000037
在本申请的一些实施方式方式中，所述第一指示信息对应的比特状态值还与所述第一参考信号的时域资源在所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的时间顺序相关。
一种可能的实现方法，该时间顺序可以是从早到晚。具体的，可以将候选的参考信号的时域资源中的时域资源按时间从早到晚进行排序，可以理解为从先到后。排序后的候选的参考信号的时域资源与第一指示信息的比特的比特状态值值分别对应，具体而言的，时间早的时域资源对应的比特状态值小于时间晚的时域资源对应的比特状态值。
示例性的，例如表12中，第一参考信号的时域资源1早于第一参考信号的时域资源2可以理解为：第一参考信号的时域资源1的起始时刻早于第一参考信号的时域资源2。同样地，第一参考信号的时域资源2早于第一参考信号的时域资源3。则根据该参考信号的时域资源的时间顺序，比特状态值01对应的信息为第一参考信号的时域资源1，比特状态值10对应的信息为第一参考信号的时域资源2，比特状态值11对应的信息为第一参考信号的时域资源3。
另一种可能的实现方法，该时间顺序可以是从晚到早。具体的，可以将候选的参考信号的时域资源中的时域资源按时间从晚到早进行排序，可以理解为从后到先。排序后的候选的参考信号的时域资源与第一指示信息的比特的比特状态值分别对应，具体而言的，时间晚的时域资源对应的比特状态值小于时间早的时域资源对应的比特状态值。
可选地，当所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一参考信号的时域资源时，所述第一指示信息对应的比特状态值与所述第一参考信号的时域资源所在的符号配置的时间顺序相关。具体可以参考所述第一指示信息对应的比特状态值与所述第一参考信号的时域资源在所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的时间顺序相关，不再赘述。
在本申请的一些实施方式中，所述第一指示信息对应的比特状态值还与所述第一参考信号的时域资源在符号配置子集的索引或符号配置索引相关。
可选地，当所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一参考信号的时域资源时，所述第一指示信息对应的比特状态值与所述第一参考信号的时域资源所在的符号配置子集的索引相关。
可选地，当所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一参考信号的时域资源时，所述第一指示信息对应的比特状态值与所述第一参考信号的时域资源所在的符号配置的索引相关。
具体的，所述第一指示信息对应的比特状态值与所述第一参考信号的时域资源所在的符号配置子集在所述符号配置集合中的索引号大小相关。
一种可能的实现方法，该比特状态值从小到大对应的索引号从小到大。具体的，可以将符号配置集合中的符号配置子集按索引号从小到大进行排序，可以理解为升序排列。排序后的符号配置子集与第一指示信息的比特的比特状态值值分别对应，具体而言的，索引号小的符号配置子集对应的比特状态值小于索引号大的符号配置子集对应的比特状态值值。
另一种可能的实现方法，该比特状态值从小到大对应的索引号从大到小。具体的，可以将符号配置集合中的符号配置子集按索引号从大到小进行排序，可以理解为降序排列。排序后的符号配置子集与第一指示信息的比特的比特状态值值分别对应，具体而言的，索引号大的符号配置子集对应的比特状态值小于索引号小的符号配置子集对应的比特状态值值。
可选地，当所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二参考信号的时域资源时，所述第一指示信息对应的比特状态值是预先定义的或高层信令配置的。
具体的，预先定义这个比特状态值是全零的状态值，或全1的比特状态值。
可选地，当所述第一指示信息用于指示所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号时，所述第一指示信息对应的比特状态值是预先定义的或高层信令配置的。
具体的，预先定义这个比特状态值是全零的状态值，或全1的比特状态值。也可以是比特状态值中的缺省值或保留值指示的所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号。
可以理解的是，第一指示信息包括两个比特状态值分别对应所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号和所述第二参考信号的时域资源时，那么这里两个比特状态值的取值是不同的。示例性的，所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号对应全零的状态值，所述第二参考信号的时域资源对应全1的状态值。示例性的，所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号对应全1的状态值，所述第二参考信号的时域资源对应全零的状态值。
在本实施例中提及的候选的参考信号的时域资源可以是高层信令配置的，也可以是预先定义的；也可以是通过符号配置集合确定的，对于每种实现方式的具体描述可以参考本申请其他实施例的相关内容，例如图3所示实施例，在此不做赘述。
上述详细阐述了本申请实施例的方法，下面提供了本申请实施例的装置。
基于上述实施例中的通信方法的同一构思，如图11所示，本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置1000，该通信装置可应用于上述图3所示的通信方法中。该通信装置1000可以是如图1所示的终端设备200，也可以是应用于该终端设备200的一个部件(例如芯片)。该通信装置1000包括处理单元11和收发单元12。其中：
处理单元11，用于获取一个或多个时间单元中候选的参考信号的时域资源；
收发单元12，用于接收下行控制信息，所述下行控制信息包括第一指示信息和第一信道的传输信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：
第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域资源；
第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或
所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源。
在一个实现方式中，当所述候选的参考信号的时域资源包括根据在所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合确定的时域资源时：
所述处理单元11，还用于将所述符号配置集合划分为一个或多个符号配置子集；以及
所述处理单元11，还用于根据所述一个或多个符号配置子集，确定候选的参考信号的时域资源。
在另一个实现方式中，所述收发单元12，用于接收第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息用于配置网络设备支持参考信号在所述候选的参考信号的时域资源上传输。
有关上述处理单元11和收发单元12更详细的描述可以直接参考上述图3所示的方法实施例中终端设备的相关描述直接得到，这里不加赘述。
基于上述实施例中的通信方法的同一构思，如图12所示，本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置2000，该通信装置可应用于上述图3所示的通信方法中。该通信装置2000可以是如图1所示的网络设备100，也可以是应用于该网络设备100的一个部件(例如芯片)。该通信装置2000包括：收发单元21。其中：
收发单元21，用于发送下行控制信息，所述下行控制信息包括第一指示信息和第一信道的传输信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：
第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域资源；
第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或
所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源；
所述收发单元21，还用于根据所述第一指示信息，传输参考信号。
在一个实现方式中，所述收发单元21，还用于发送第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息用于配置网络设备支持参考信号在所述候选的参考信号的时域资源上传输。
有关上述收发单元21更详细的描述可以直接参考上述图3所示的方法实施例中网络设备的相关描述直接得到，这里不加赘述。
基于上述实施例中的通信方法的同一构思，如图13所示，本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置3000，该通信装置可应用于上述图5所示的通信方法中。该通信装置3000可以是如图1所示的终端设备200，也可以是应用于该终端设备200的一个部件(例如芯片)。该通信装置3000包括收发单元31和处理单元32。其中：
收发单元31，用于获取一个或多个时间单元的信息。
处理单元32，用于根据所述一个或多个时间单元的信息，确定所述一个或多个时间单 元中的符号配置集合。
所述处理单元32，还用于根据所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合，确定候选的参考信号的时域资源。
所述收发单元31，还用于接收下行控制信息。
所述收发单元31，还用于根据所述下行控制信息传输第一信道和参考信号。
在一个实现方式中，所述处理单元32，还用于将所述符号配置集合划分为一个或多个符号配置子集，并根据所述一个或多个符号配置子集，确定候选的参考信号的时域资源。
有关上述收发单元31和处理单元32更详细的描述可以直接参考上述图5所示的方法实施例中终端设备的相关描述直接得到，这里不加赘述。
基于上述实施例中的通信方法的同一构思，如图14所示，本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置4000，该通信装置可应用于上述图5所示的通信方法中。该通信装置4000可以是如图1所示的网络设备100，也可以是应用于该网络设备100的一个部件(例如芯片)。该通信装置4000包括：收发单元41。其中：
收发单元41，用于发送下行控制信息。
所述收发单元41，还用于根据所述下行控制信息传输第一信道和参考信号。
有关上述收发单元41更详细的描述可以直接参考上述图5所示的方法实施例中网络设备的相关描述直接得到，这里不加赘述。
基于上述实施例中的通信方法的同一构思，如图15所示，本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置5000，该通信装置可应用于上述图8所示的通信方法中。该通信装置5000可以是如图1所示的终端设备200，也可以是应用于该终端设备200的一个部件(例如芯片)。该通信装置5000包括收发单元51。其中：
收发单元51，用于接收第一信息。该第一信息用于指示终端设备传输N个第一信道，其中，N为大于或等于2的整数。
所述收发单元51，还用于根据第二信道传输参考信号。其中，所述第二信道为所述N个第一信道中在一个时间单元内按时域顺序的第X个第一信道，其中，X为大于或等于1的整数，且X小于或等于N。
在一个实现方式中，所述收发单元51，还用于向网络设备发送能力信息，所述能力信息用于指示所述终端设备具有在N个第一信道中的部分信道上传输参考信号的能力。
在另一个实现方式中，所述收发单元51，还用于接收第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述终端设备可以在N个第一信道中的部分信道上传输参考信号。
在又一个实现方式中，所述收发单元51，还用于接收第三信息，所述第三信息用于指示所述终端设备不可以在N个第一信道中的部分信道上传输参考信号。
有关上述收发单元51更详细的描述可以直接参考上述图8所示的方法实施例中终端设备的相关描述直接得到，这里不加赘述。
基于上述实施例中的通信方法的同一构思，如图16所示，本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置6000，该通信装置可应用于上述图8所示的通信方法中。该通信装置6000可以是如图1所示的网络设备100，也可以是应用于该网络设备100的一个部件(例如芯片)。该通信装置6000包括：收发单元61。其中：
收发单元61，用于发送第一信息。该第一信息用于指示终端设备传输N个第一信道，其中，N为大于或等于2的整数。
所述收发单元61，还用于根据第二信道传输参考信号。其中，所述第二信道为所述N个第一信道中在一个时间单元内按时域顺序的第X个第一信道，其中，X为大于或等于1的整数，且X小于或等于N。
在一个实现方式中，所述收发单元61，还用于接收来自所述终端设备的能力信息，所述能力信息用于指示所述终端设备具有在N个第一信道中的部分信道上传输参考信号的能力。
在另一个实现方式中，所述收发单元61，还用于发送第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述终端设备可以在N个第一信道中的部分信道上传输参考信号。
在又一个实现方式中，所述收发单元61，还用于发送第三信息，所述第三信息用于指示所述终端设备不可以在N个第一信道中的部分信道上传输参考信号。
有关上述收发单元61更详细的描述可以直接参考上述图8所示的方法实施例中网络设备的相关描述直接得到，这里不加赘述。
基于上述实施例中的通信方法的同一构思，如图17所示，本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置7000，该通信装置可应用于上述图9所示的通信方法中。该通信装置7000可以是如图1所示的终端设备200，也可以是应用于该终端设备200的一个部件(例如芯片)。该通信装置7000包括收发单元71。其中：
收发单元71，用于获取一个或多个时间单元中候选的参考信号的时域资源。
收发单元71，还用于接收下行控制信息。其中，下行控制信息包括第一指示信息。
其中，第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：
第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域资源；或
第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或
所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源。
所述收发单元71，还用于根据所述下行控制信息传输参考信号。
有关上述收发单元71更详细的描述可以直接参考上述图9所示的方法实施例中终端设备的相关描述直接得到，这里不加赘述。
基于上述实施例中的通信方法的同一构思，如图18所示，本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置8000，该通信装置可应用于上述图9所示的通信方法中。该通信装置8000可以是如图1所示的网络设备100，也可以是应用于该网络设备100的一个部件(例如芯片)。该通信装置8000包括：收发单元81。其中：
收发单元81，还用于发送下行控制信息。其中，下行控制信息包括第一指示信息。
其中，第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：
第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域资源；或
第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域 资源中的一个或多个符号；或
所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源。
所述收发单元81，还用于根据所述下行控制信息传输参考信号。
有关上述收发单元81更详细的描述可以直接参考上述图9所示的方法实施例中网络设备的相关描述直接得到，这里不加赘述。
本申请实施例中还提供一种通信装置，该通信装置用于执行上述通信方法。上述通信方法中的部分或全部可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现。
可选地，通信装置在具体实现时可以是芯片或者集成电路。
可选地，当上述实施例的通信方法中的部分或全部通过软件来实现时，通信装置包括：存储器，用于存储程序；处理器，用于执行存储器存储的程序，当程序被执行时，使得通信装置可以实现上述实施例提供的通信方法。
可选地，上述存储器可以是物理上独立的单元，也可以与处理器集成在一起。
可选地，当上述实施例的通信方法中的部分或全部通过软件实现时，通信装置也可以只包括处理器。用于存储程序的存储器位于通信装置之外，处理器通过电路/电线与存储器连接，用于读取并执行存储器中存储的程序。
处理器可以是中央处理器(central processing unit，CPU)，网络处理器(network processor，NP)或者CPU和NP的组合。
处理器还可以进一步包括硬件芯片。上述硬件芯片可以是专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit，ASIC)，可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device，PLD)或其组合。上述PLD可以是复杂可编程逻辑器件(complex programmable logic device，CPLD)，现场可编程逻辑门阵列(field-programmable gate array，FPGA)，通用阵列逻辑(generic array logic，GAL)或其任意组合。
存储器可以包括易失性存储器(volatile memory)，例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory，RAM)；存储器也可以包括非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory)，例如快闪存储器(flash memory)，硬盘(hard disk drive，HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive，SSD)；存储器还可以包括上述种类的存储器的组合。
图19示出了一种简化的终端设备的结构示意图。便于理解和图示方便，图19中，终端设备以手机作为例子。如图19所示，作为一个实施例，终端设备可以包括处理器。处理器用于实现上述实施例中终端设备所执行的方法。
处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，以及对终端设备进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据等。所述终端设备还可以包括存储器，存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。所述终端设备还可以包括射频电路、天线、输入输出装置中的任一种，射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理，天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号，输入输出装置，例如触摸屏、显示屏，键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。需要说明的是，有些种类的终端设备可以不具有输入输出装置。
作为另一个实施例，终端设备包括处理器和收发装置。处理器与所述收发装置耦合，所述处理器用于执行计算机程序或指令，以控制所述收发装置进行信息的接收和发送；当 所述处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令时，所述处理器还用于实现上述实施例中终端设备所执行的方法。
在本申请实施例中，可以将具有收发功能的天线和射频电路视为终端设备的接收单元和发送单元(也可以统称为收发单元)，将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备的处理单元。如图19所示，终端设备包括收发单元91和处理单元92。收发单元91也可以称为接收/发送器、接收/发送机、接收/发送电路等。处理单元92也可以称为处理器，处理单板，处理模块、处理装置等。
例如，在一个实施例中，处理单元92用于执行图3所示实施例中的步骤S101；以及收发单元91用于执行图3所示实施例中的步骤S102和S103中的终端设备的功能。
又如，在另一个实施例中，处理单元92用于执行图5所示实施例中的步骤S201～S203；以及收发单元91用于执行图5所示实施例中的步骤S204和S205中的终端设备的功能。
又如，在又一个实施例中，收发单元91用于执行图8所示实施例中的步骤S301中的终端设备的功能；以及处理单元92用于执行图8所示实施例中的步骤S302。
又如，在又一个实施例中，处理单元92用于执行图9所示实施例中的步骤S401；以及收发单元91用于执行图9所示实施例中的步骤S402中的终端设备的功能。
作为又一个实施例，终端设备包括处理器和存储器，所述存储器存储有计算机程序或指令，当所述处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令时，所述处理器用于实现上述实施例中终端设备所执行的方法。
当需要发送数据时，处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后，输出基带信号至射频电路，射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时，射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号，将射频信号转换为基带信号，并将基带信号输出至处理器，处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。为便于说明，图19中仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端设备产品中，可以存在一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以是独立于处理器设置，也可以是与处理器集成在一起，本申请实施例对此不做限制。
在一个实施例中，提供一种通信装置，包括处理器和收发装置，所述处理器与所述收发装置耦合，所述处理器用于执行计算机程序或指令，以控制所述收发装置进行信息的接收和发送；当所述处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令时，所述处理器还用于实现上述方法实施例中网络设备执行的方法。
图20示出了一种简化的网络设备的结构示意图。网络设备包括射频信号收发及转换部分以及202部分，该射频信号收发及转换部分又包括收发单元201部分。射频信号收发及转换部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换；202部分主要用于基带处理，对网络设备进行控制等。收发单元201也可以称为接收/发送器、接收/发送机、接收/发送电路等。202部分通常是网络设备的控制中心，通常可以称为处理单元，用于控制网络设备执行上述图3、图5、图8或图9中关于网络设备所执行的步骤。具体可参见上述相关部分的描述。
例如，在一个实施例中，收发单元201用于执行图3所示实施例中的步骤S102和S103 中网络设备的功能。
又如，在另一个实施例中，收发单元201用于执行图5所示实施例中的步骤S204和S205中网络设备的功能。
又如，在又一个实施例中，收发单元201用于执行图8所示实施例中的步骤S301中网络设备的功能。
又如，在又一个实施例中，收发单元201用于执行图9所示实施例中的步骤S402和S403中网络设备的功能。
在另一个实施例中，提供一种通信装置，包括处理器，该处理器用于实现上述方法实施例中网络设备执行的方法。
在又一个实施例中，提供一种通信装置，包括处理器和存储器，所述存储器存储有计算机程序或指令，当所述处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令时，所述处理器用于实现上述方法实施例中网络设备执行的方法。
如图20所示，202部分可以包括一个或多个单板，每个单板可以包括一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器，处理器用于读取和执行存储器中的程序以实现基带处理功能以及对网络设备的控制。若存在多个单板，各个单板之间可以互联以增加处理能力。作为一中可选地实施方式，也可以是多个单板共用一个或多个处理器，或者是多个单板共用一个或多个存储器，或者是多个单板同时共用一个或多个处理器。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令，当该计算机程序或指令被执行时，实现上述实施例中的方法。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统，包括上述实施例中的终端设备以及网络设备。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。另外，各个方法实施例之间、各个装置实施例之间也可以互相参考，在不同实施例中的相同或对应内容可以互相引用，不做赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，该单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如，多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合、或直接耦合、或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。该计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行该计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例的流程或功能。该计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。该计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者通过该计算机可读存储介质进行传输。该计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或 数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line，DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。该计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。该可用介质可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)，或随机存储存储器(random access memory，RAM)，或磁性介质，例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带、磁碟、或光介质，例如，数字通用光盘(digital versatile disc，DVD)、或者半导体介质，例如，固态硬盘(solid state disk，SSD)等。

Claims (58)

  1. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    获取一个或多个时间单元中候选的参考信号的时域资源；
    接收下行控制信息，所述下行控制信息包括第一指示信息和第一信道的传输信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：
    第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域资源；
    第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或
    所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源。
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述候选的参考信号的时域资源包括根据在所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合确定的时域资源时，所述方法还包括：
    将所述符号配置集合划分为一个或多个符号配置子集；
    根据所述一个或多个符号配置子集，确定候选的参考信号的时域资源。
  3. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：接收第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息用于配置终端设备支持参考信号在所述候选的参考信号的时域资源上传输。
  4. 根据权利要求1～3任一项所述的方法，所述方法还包括：接收第二配置信息，所述第二配置信息终端设备支持所述第一信道的时域资源上不存在参考信号。
  5. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    发送下行控制信息，所述下行控制信息包括第一指示信息和第一信道的传输信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：
    第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域资源；
    第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或
    所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源；
    根据所述第一指示信息，传输参考信号。
  6. 如权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：发送第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息用于配置终端设备支持参考信号在所述候选的参考信号的时域资源上传输。
  7. 根据权利要求5或6所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述候选的参考信号的时域资源包括根据在所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合确定的时域资源时，所述方法还包括：将所述符号配置集合划分为一个或多个符号配置子集；以及根据所述一个或多个符号配置子集，确定候选的参考信号的时域资源。
  8. 根据权利要求5～7任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：发送第二配置信息，所述第二配置信息用于配置终端设备支持所述第一信道的时域资源上不存在参考信号。
  9. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：终端设备获取一个或多个时间单元的信息；所述终端设备根据所述一个或多个时间单元的信息，确定所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合；所述终端设备根据所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合，确定候选的参考信号的时域资源；所述终端设备接收下行控制信息，所述下行控制信息包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域资源；第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源；所述终端设备根据所述下行控制信息传输第一信道和参考信号。
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备根据所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合，确定候选的参考信号的时域资源，包括：将所述符号配置集合划分为一个或多个符号配置子集，并根据所述一个或多个符号配置子集，确定候选的参考信号的时域资源。
  11. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：网络设备发送下行控制信息，所述下行控制信息包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域资源；第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源；所述网络设备根据所述下行控制信息传输第一信道和参考信号。
  12. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：终端设备接收第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示所述终端设备传输N个第一信道；所述终端设备根据第二信道传输参考信号，其中，所述第二信道为所述N个第一信道中在一个时间单元内按时域顺序的第X个第一信道，其中，X为大于或等于1的整数，N为大于或等于2的整数，且X小于或等于N，所述参考信号的时域资源在所述第二信道所在的时域资源之中或者所述参考信号的时域资源在所述第二信道所在的时域资源之前。
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备根据第二信道传输参考信号，包括：所述终端设备根据第二信道，在所述第二信道所在的时域资源中的第一符号传输所述参考信号；或者所述终端设备根据第二信道，在所述第二信道所在的时域资源之前的第一符号传输所述参考信号；其中，所述第一符号为按时域顺序的第Y个符号，Y为大于或等于1的正整数，所述第一符号的数量小于或等于N。
  14. 根据权利要求12或13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：所述终端设备向网络设备发送能力信息，所述能力信息用于指示所述终端设备具有在N个第一信道中的部分信道上传输参考信号的能力。
  15. 根据权利要求12～14任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括，所述终端设备接收第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述终端设备在N个第一信道中的部分信道上传输参考信号。
  16. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：网络设备发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示所述终端设备传输N个第一信道；所述网络设备根据第二信道传输参考信号，其中， 所述第二信道为所述N个第一信道中在一个时间单元内按时域顺序的第X个第一信道，其中，X为大于或等于1的整数，N为大于或等于2的整数，且X小于或等于N，所述参考信号的时域资源在所述第二信道所在的时域资源之中或者所述参考信号的时域资源在所述第二信道所在的时域资源之前。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法，其特征在于，所述网络设备根据第二信道传输参考信号，包括：所述网络设备根据第二信道，在所述第二信道所在的时域资源中的第一符号传输所述参考信号；或者所述网络设备根据第二信道，在所述第二信道所在的时域资源之前的第一符号传输所述参考信号；其中，所述第一符号为按时域顺序的第Y个符号，Y为大于或等于1的正整数，所述第一符号的数量小于或等于N。
  18. 根据权利要求16或17所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：所述网络设备接收来自所述终端设备的能力信息，所述能力信息用于指示所述终端设备具有在N个第一信道中的部分信道上传输参考信号的能力。
  19. 根据权利要求16～18任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：所述网络设备发送第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述终端设备可以N个第一信道中的部分信道上传输参考信号。
  20. 根据权利要求12～19任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述N个第一信道承载相同的传输块。
  21. 根据权利要求12～20任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二信道对应第一冗余版本。
  22. 根据权利要求12～21任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二信道为所述N个第一信道中在每个时间单元内的按时域顺序的第X个第一信道。
  23. 根据权利要求12～22任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述N个第一信道中，相邻的两个第一信道所在时域资源的起始符号之间的符号间隔小于14个符号，或者所述N个第一信道中，相邻的两个第一信道中后一个第一信道所在时域资源的起始符号是前一个第一信道所在时域资源的终止符号之后的第一个符号。
  24. 根据权利要求12～23任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信道为有效的上行信道，所述有效的上行信道所在的时域资源不包括任意一个下行符号；或者所述第一信道为有效的下行信道，所述有效的下行信道所在的时域资源不包括任意一个上行符号。
  25. 根据权利要求12～24任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述第一信道为上行信道，所述第一符号为上行符号；或者当所述第一信道为下行信道，所述第一符号为下行符号。
  26. 根据权利要求12～25任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息包括所述第一信道的重复次数，和/或，N个所述第一信道中的一个或多个第一信道所在的时域资源的信息。
  27. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：终端设备获取一个或多个时间单元中候选的参考信号的时域资源；终端设备接收下行控制信息，所述下行控制信息包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域以至于；或第二 参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源；所述终端设备根据所述第一指示信息传输参考信号。
  28. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：网络设备发送下行控制信息，所述下行控制信息包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域以至于；或第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源；所述网络设备根据所述第一指示信息传输参考信号。
  29. 如权利要求1至28任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述候选的参考信号的时域资源包括以下一个或多个时域资源：
    高层信令配置的时域资源；
    预先定义的时域资源；或
    根据在所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合确定的时域资源，所述符号配置集合为符号配置列表的子集或全集。
  30. 如权利要求1至29任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述候选的参考信号的时域资源为所述一个或多个时间单元中的以下一个或多个符号：
    所述一个或多个时间单元中最早的时间单元中的第一个符号；
    所述一个或多个时间单元中最后的时间单元中的最后一个符号；
    所述一个或多个时间单元中预先定义的一个或多个符号；
    所述一个或多个时间单元中高层信令配置的一个或多个符号。
  31. 如权利要求1至30任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息的比特数量与所述候选的参考信号的时域资源的个数相关。
  32. 如权利要求31所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息的比特数量为ceiling(log2(1+Z1))个比特或ceiling(log2(2+Z1))个比特，其中，ceiling表示向上取整，Z1为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源的时域资源个数。
  33. 如权利要求1至30任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息的比特数量与所述符号配置子集的个数相关。
  34. 如权利要求33所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息的比特数量为ceiling(log2(1+Z2))个比特或ceiling(log2(2+Z2))个比特，其中，ceiling表示向上取整，Z2为符号配置子集的个数。
  35. 如权利要求1至34任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一参考信号的时域资源时，所述第一指示信息对应的比特状态值与所述第一参考信号的时域资源相关。
  36. 如权利要求35所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息对应的比特状态值与所述第一参考信号的时域资源在所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的时间顺序相关。
  37. 如权利要求33或34所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一参考信号的时域资源时，所述第一指示信息对应的比特状态值与所述第一参考信号 的时域资源所在的符号配置子集的索引相关。
  38. 根据权利要求1～37任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述下行控制信息还包括：所述第一指示信息对应的第一比特状态值，所述第一比特状态值用于指示在所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号，所述第一比特状态值是预先定义的；和/或，所述第一指示信息对应的第二比特状态值，所述第二比特状态值用于指示所述第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二比特状态值是预先定义的。
  39. 如权利要求33所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息的比特中的一个或多个比特与所述符号配置子集一一对应。
  40. 如权利要求1至39任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一指示信息还包括偏移值，所述偏移值包括以下的一种或多种：
    所述第一参考信号的时域资源所在的时隙与所述第一信道所在的时隙之间的时隙偏移值；
    所述第一参考信号的时域资源的起始符号与所述第一信道的起始符号之间的符号偏移值；
    所述第一参考信号的时域资源的起始符号与所述第一信道的终止符号之间的符号偏移值；
    所述第一参考信号的时域资源的终止符号与所述第一信道的终止符号之间的符号偏移值。
  41. 根据权利要求1～40任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述候选的参考信号的时域资源包括高层信令配置的时域资源和/或预先定义的时域资源，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一指示信息包括符号信息和/或时隙信息，其中，所述符号信息为以下一种或多种：绝对符号索引，相对所述第一信道的起始符号的符号偏移索引，相对所述第一信道的终止符号的符号偏移索引；所述时隙信息为以下一种或多种：绝对时隙索引，相对所述第一信道所在时隙的时隙偏移索引。
  42. 如权利要求41所述的方法，其特征在于，所述候选的参考信号的时域资源包括高层信令配置的参考信号的时域资源，所述高层信令配置的参考信号的时域资源包括以下一种或多种：
    高层信令针对时隙配置的；
    高层信令针对下行控制信息的格式配置的；
    高层信令针对无线网络临时标识RNTI配置的；
    高层信令针对第一信道的映射类型配置的；或
    高层信令针对下行控制信息的搜索空间配置的；
    所述候选的参考信号的时域资源为所述一个或多个时间单元中的以下一个或多个符号：所述一个或多个时间单元中最早的时间单元中的第一个符号；所述一个或多个时间单元中最后的时间单元中的最后一个符号；所述一个或多个时间单元中预先定义的一个或多个符号；所述一个或多个时间单元中高层信令配置的一个或多个符号。
  43. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    处理单元，用于获取一个或多个时间单元中候选的参考信号的时域资源；
    收发单元，用于接收下行控制信息，所述下行控制信息包括第一指示信息和第一信道的传输信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：
    第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域资源；
    第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或
    所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源。
  44. 如权利要求43所述的通信装置，其特征在于，当所述候选的参考信号的时域资源包括根据在所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合确定的时域资源时：
    所述处理单元，还用于将所述符号配置集合划分为一个或多个符号配置子集；以及
    所述处理单元，还用于根据所述一个或多个符号配置子集，确定候选的参考信号的时域资源。
  45. 如权利要求43或44所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元，用于接收第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息用于配置网络设备支持参考信号在所述候选的参考信号的时域资源上传输。
  46. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    收发单元，用于发送下行控制信息，所述下行控制信息包括第一指示信息和第一信道的传输信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示以下一种或多种信息：
    第一参考信号的时域资源，所述第一参考信号的时域资源为所述候选的参考信号的时域资源中的一个或多个时域资源；
    第二参考信号的时域资源，所述第二参考信号的时域资源为所述第一信道所在的时域资源中的一个或多个符号；或
    所述一个或多个时间单元上没有参考信号的时域资源；
    所述收发单元，还用于根据所述第一指示信息，传输参考信号。
  47. 如权利要求46所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元，还用于发送第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息用于配置网络设备支持参考信号在所述候选的参考信号的时域资源上传输。
  48. 如权利要求43至47任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述候选的参考信号的时域资源包括以下一个或多个时域资源：
    高层信令配置的时域资源；
    预先定义的时域资源；或
    根据在所述一个或多个时间单元中的符号配置集合确定的时域资源，所述符号配置集合为符号配置列表的子集或全集。
  49. 如权利要求43至48任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息的比特数量与所述候选的参考信号的时域资源的个数相关。
  50. 如权利要求43至48任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息的比特数量与所述符号配置子集的个数相关。
  51. 如权利要求43至48任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，当所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一参考信号的时域资源时，所述第一指示信息对应的比特状态值与所述第一参考信号的时域资源相关。
  52. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有计算机程序，其特征在于，该程序被处理器执行时实现如权利要求1～42中任一项所述的方法。
  53. 一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，其特征在于，当所述指令在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如权利要求1～42任一项所述的方法。
  54. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器，所述处理器用于与存储器耦合，并读取存储器中的指令，并根据所述指令实现如权利要求1至42中任一项所述的方法。
  55. 一种终端设备，包括用于实现如权利要求1-4任一项、9～10任一项、12～15任一项、20～26任一项、27、或29～42任一项所述方法的单元或手段(means)。
  56. 一种网络设备，包括用于实现如权利要求5～8任一项、11、16～19任一项、20～26任一项、或28～42任一项所述方法的单元或手段(means)。
  57. 一种通信装置，用于执行如权利要求1-4任一项、9～10任一项、12～15任一项、20～26任一项、27、或29～42任一项任一所述的方法。
  58. 一种通信装置，用于执行如权利要求5～8任一项、11、16～19任一项、20～26任一项、或28～42任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2019/104368 2018-09-07 2019-09-04 通信方法及装置 WO2020048481A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP19856741.4A EP3836469A4 (en) 2018-09-07 2019-09-04 COMMUNICATION PROCESS AND APPARATUS
US17/193,210 US11937281B2 (en) 2018-09-07 2021-03-05 Communications method and apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201811042617.4A CN110890947B (zh) 2018-09-07 2018-09-07 通信方法及装置
CN201811042617.4 2018-09-07

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/193,210 Continuation US11937281B2 (en) 2018-09-07 2021-03-05 Communications method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020048481A1 true WO2020048481A1 (zh) 2020-03-12

Family

ID=69722163

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/104368 WO2020048481A1 (zh) 2018-09-07 2019-09-04 通信方法及装置

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US11937281B2 (zh)
EP (1) EP3836469A4 (zh)
CN (1) CN110890947B (zh)
WO (1) WO2020048481A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113853025B (zh) * 2020-06-28 2024-04-19 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 一种信号传输方法、装置、设备及存储介质
WO2022032651A1 (en) * 2020-08-14 2022-02-17 Qualcomm Incorporated Physical uplink shared channel with switched antenna and frequency hopping
US20220123890A1 (en) * 2020-10-16 2022-04-21 Qualcomm Incorporated Reference signal based information using index modulation
CN117956587A (zh) * 2022-10-28 2024-04-30 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 一种被用于无线通信的节点中的方法和装置
WO2024113238A1 (zh) * 2022-11-30 2024-06-06 华为技术有限公司 一种感知信号的传输方法及相关装置

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103944665A (zh) * 2013-01-18 2014-07-23 中兴通讯股份有限公司 上行解调参考信号的发送方法、装置和系统
CN106549745A (zh) * 2015-09-17 2017-03-29 中兴通讯股份有限公司 参考信号的发送方法及装置、接收方法及装置
CN107770866A (zh) * 2016-08-18 2018-03-06 中国电信股份有限公司 一种上行参考信号的传输方法、装置及终端
WO2018084588A1 (en) * 2016-11-04 2018-05-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for reporting channel state information
CN108400848A (zh) * 2017-02-04 2018-08-14 华为技术有限公司 一种指示方法及装置

Family Cites Families (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2793420B1 (en) * 2010-01-07 2019-05-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd User equipment, base station, and method for enhancing features of uplink reference signals
EP2903174B1 (en) * 2012-09-27 2019-11-13 Electronics and Telecommunications Research Institute Method for signaling control information for coordinated multipoint transmission in wireless communication system
CN104081872B (zh) * 2013-01-25 2018-01-23 华为技术有限公司 解调参考信号传输方法、用户设备和基站
CN104125186B (zh) * 2013-04-28 2019-08-30 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种解调参考信号图样信息的选取方法、系统及装置
US9780934B2 (en) * 2013-05-09 2017-10-03 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for puncturing UE specific reference signal in radio access system supporting new carrier type and apparatus supporting same
US11006400B2 (en) * 2015-01-16 2021-05-11 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha User equipments, base stations and methods
US9743392B2 (en) * 2015-01-30 2017-08-22 Motorola Mobility Llc Method and apparatus for signaling aperiodic channel state indication reference signals for LTE operation
US20160323901A1 (en) * 2015-05-01 2016-11-03 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for channel measurement and report in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
CN107733613B (zh) * 2016-08-12 2022-06-21 中兴通讯股份有限公司 上行解调参考信号dmrs的发送方法及装置
CN108023698B (zh) * 2016-11-03 2021-01-29 华为技术有限公司 配置参考信号的方法和装置

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103944665A (zh) * 2013-01-18 2014-07-23 中兴通讯股份有限公司 上行解调参考信号的发送方法、装置和系统
CN106549745A (zh) * 2015-09-17 2017-03-29 中兴通讯股份有限公司 参考信号的发送方法及装置、接收方法及装置
CN107770866A (zh) * 2016-08-18 2018-03-06 中国电信股份有限公司 一种上行参考信号的传输方法、装置及终端
WO2018084588A1 (en) * 2016-11-04 2018-05-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for reporting channel state information
CN108400848A (zh) * 2017-02-04 2018-08-14 华为技术有限公司 一种指示方法及装置

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
NOKIA: "CR to 38.214 capturing the RAN1#94 meeting agreements", 3GPP TSG-RAN1 MEETING #94 R1-1810021, 24 August 2018 (2018-08-24), XP051477061 *
See also references of EP3836469A4

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN110890947B (zh) 2021-10-01
US11937281B2 (en) 2024-03-19
CN110890947A (zh) 2020-03-17
EP3836469A4 (en) 2021-11-03
US20210204293A1 (en) 2021-07-01
EP3836469A1 (en) 2021-06-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11930508B2 (en) Downlink control information transmission method
US11363499B2 (en) Resource configuration method, apparatus, and system
WO2020030064A1 (zh) 信息传输方法、监听方法、装置、基站、终端及存储介质
WO2020048481A1 (zh) 通信方法及装置
WO2019029338A1 (zh) 一种信息传输方法及装置
CN110892669A (zh) 在无线通信系统中发送下行链路控制信息的方法和装置
WO2018210243A1 (zh) 一种通信方法和装置
WO2020200114A1 (zh) Dmrs端口的指示方法及装置
WO2021146998A1 (zh) 一种确定初始带宽部分bwp的方法、装置及存储介质
WO2021204300A1 (zh) 控制信息传输方法
KR20200013775A (ko) 대역폭 자원 구성 방법, 장치 및 시스템
WO2020169063A1 (zh) 一种数据传输方法及通信装置
WO2020063831A1 (zh) 通信方法及装置
US11258571B2 (en) Downlink control information transmission method, apparatus, and system
CN113424478A (zh) 用于在无线通信系统中发送和接收下行链路控制信息的方法和装置
WO2021062687A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
CN110547025B (zh) 发送和接收上行数据的方法、用户设备和基站
US11564220B2 (en) Resource assignment method, related device, and apparatus
JP7477094B2 (ja) 通信方法、通信装置、通信システム、コンピュータ可読記憶媒体、コンピュータプログラムおよびチップ
JP2020504542A (ja) 受信ノード、送信ノード、及び伝送方法
WO2019192515A1 (zh) 一种反馈信息的传输方法和装置
US20230088283A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting overlapping downlink and uplink channels in wireless communication system
WO2023029540A1 (zh) 多载波调度的方法和装置
WO2021134572A1 (zh) 通信方法和通信设备
KR20240017018A (ko) 물리 계층 프로토콜 데이터 유닛 전송 방법, 트리거 프레임 전송 방법 및 장치

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19856741

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2019856741

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20210312